Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2021 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 334
1 of 334

Summary of Content for Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2021 Owner's Manual PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN.

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN.

Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

3 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

TABLE OF CONTENTS

NOTES Information.............................................................................................................................. 8

QUICK REFERENCE Entering.................................................................................................................................. 16

Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................20

On the road............................................................................................................................ 23

AT A GLANCE Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32

Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36

General settings................................................................................................................... 42

Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................51

CONTROLS Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 52

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel.................................................................................73

Transporting children safely............................................................................................ 85

Driving.................................................................................................................................... 91

Displays................................................................................................................................ 116

Lights.................................................................................................................................... 132

Safety.....................................................................................................................................138

Driving stability control systems.................................................................................158

Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 163

Climate control...................................................................................................................183

Interior equipment............................................................................................................193

Storage compartments.....................................................................................................201

Cargo area............................................................................................................................204

4 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 212

Reducing fuel consumption........................................................................................... 217

ENTERTAINMENT General information......................................................................................................... 224

Tone.......................................................................................................................................226

Radio..................................................................................................................................... 228

Audio.....................................................................................................................................236

COMMUNICATION Telephone............................................................................................................................ 240

MINI Connected................................................................................................................ 244

MOBILITY Refueling..............................................................................................................................248

Fuel........................................................................................................................................250

Wheels and tires................................................................................................................252

Engine compartment........................................................................................................273

Engine oil.............................................................................................................................276

Coolant..................................................................................................................................280

Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 282

Replacing components.................................................................................................... 284

Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 294

Care........................................................................................................................................303

REFERENCE Technical data.................................................................................................................... 308

Appendix..............................................................................................................................311

License Texts and Certifications..................................................................................312

Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................320

5 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID5 II/20, 03 20 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is pro- vided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap- pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Additional sources of informa- tion

Service center A service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.

Internet Vehicle information and general informa- tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa- ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

MINI Motorers Guide app The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app for iOS or Android in the respective Store.

MINI Motorers Guide Web Drivers Guide Web shows the most suita- ble information for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually installed in the vehicle will be explained. Drivers Guide Web can be dis- played in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Sym- bol

Meaning

Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

"..." Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

Action steps Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. The steps must be car- ried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

Enumerations Enumerations without mandatory order or alternative possibilities are presented as a list with bullet points.

First possibility.

Seite 8

NOTES Information

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components This symbol on a vehicle component

indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and op- tional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates fea- tures and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the se- lected optional features or the country-spe- cific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

For any options and equipment not descri- bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealers service center is happy to an- swer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con- ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-

tures described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap- pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

Manufacturer The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri- sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Intended use Heed the following when using the vehicle:

Owner's Manual.

Information on the vehicle. Do not re- move stickers.

Technical vehicle data.

The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven.

Vehicle documents and statutory docu- ments.

Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ- ent country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operat- ing conditions and registration require- ments. If your vehicle does not comply with

Seite 9

Information NOTES

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge war- ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information on warranty is available from a service center.

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that you entrust corresponding pro- cedures to a MINI dealers service center. If you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for in- stance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damage and related safety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of components, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety risk.

Parts and accessories The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends the use of parts and accessory prod- ucts approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific of- ficial approval was issued. The manufac- turer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning For vehicles sold in California, the law re- quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au- tomobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnish- ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi- cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and repro- ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi- cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other re- productive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of Cali- fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in labo- ratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and wa- ter. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- hicle.

Seite 10

NOTES Information

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals in- cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex- haust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well- ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- hicle.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publica- tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

Federal Emissions System Defect War- ranty.

Federal Emissions Performance War- ranty.

California Emission Control System Lim- ited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models or in the War- ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana- dian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operat- ing conditions and homologation require- ments in your country and continental re- gion in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region,

you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating con- ditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please con- tact Customer Relations for further informa- tion.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

MINI Maintenance system.

Service and Warranty Information Book- let for US models.

Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained or is im- properly maintained, this could result in se- rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim- ited Warranty.

Refer to chapter engine oil change regard- ing recommended service intervals for oil changes.

Data memory

General information Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self- generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance dur- ing driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facili- tate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of

Seite 11

Information NOTES

11 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam- ple.

Personal reference Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi- cle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number, li- cense plate and corresponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, for instance via utilized services.

Operating data in the vehicle Control units process data to operate the ve- hicle.

For example, this includes:

Status messages for the vehicle and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota- tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.

Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating pe- riod.

Electronic components, e.g. control units and ignition keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component us- age, maintenance requirements events or faults can be stored temporarily or perma- nently.

This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system, or the environment, for instance:

Operating states of system components, for instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery status.

Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes.

Responses by the vehicle to special sit- uations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability con- trol systems.

Information on vehicle-damaging events.

The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is volatile and is only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small share of the data is stored event-related in event or fault memories.

When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and qual- ity assurance measures, this technical infor- mation can be read out from the vehicle to- gether with the vehicle identification number.

A dealers service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop can read out the information. The socket for OBD On- board Diagnosis required by law in the ve- hicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical con- ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi- fication of the fault, compliance with war- ranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has product monitoring duties to meet in line with prod- uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle manufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealers service center or

Seite 12

NOTES Information

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, com- fort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time.

For example, this includes:

Settings for the seat and steering wheel positions.

Suspension and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending on the respective equipment:

Multimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system.

Address book data for use in conjunc- tion with an integrated hands-free sys- tem or an integrated navigation system.

Entered navigation destinations.

Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been con- nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time.

This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.

Incorporation of mobile devices Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo- bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in- stance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile de- vice can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain in- formation is transferred to the mobile de- vice at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation, this includes, for in- stance position data and other general vehi- cle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac- tive access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information If the vehicle has a wireless network con- nection, this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned, the corre- sponding functions are described in the ap-

Seite 13

Information NOTES

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

propriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele- vant legal information pertaining to data protection is provided there too. Personal data may be used to perform online serv- ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con- nection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of per- sonal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrange- ment or consent. It is also possible to acti- vate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is, with the exception of func- tions and services required by law such as Assist systems.

Services from other providers When using online services from other pro- viders, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this proc- ess. Information on the way in which per- sonal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash- like situations, such as an air bag deploy- ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- cord such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating.

Whether or not the driver and passen- ger safety belts were fastened.

How far, if at all, the driver was depress- ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driv- ing conditions and no personal data, for in- stance name, gender, age, and crash loca- tion, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce- ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the ve- hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the spe- cial equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Seite 14

NOTES Information

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in- jury or death, you should immediately in- form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti- fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box

1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of ve- hicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about mo- tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

Seite 15

Information NOTES

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Entering

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: open the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to un- lock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking system

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehi- cle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the ve- hicle.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Seite 16

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Comfort Access

Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operat- ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- cle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Opening and closing the tailgate with no-touch activation

Concept

The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-touch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying.

Performing the foot movement

1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at approx. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di- rection of travel and immediately pull it back.

Tailgate

Without automatic tailgate: unlocking

Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outside of the tailgate.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Seite 17

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked.

With automatic tailgate: Opening

Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked.

Without automatic tailgate: Closing Closing the tailgate manually.

With automatic tailgate: Closing

Press the button on the inside of the tail- gate.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig- nal

3 Instrument cluster

4 Wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Seite 18

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driver's door

1 Safety switch

2 Power windows

3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever

2 Controller with buttons

3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

Concept The Central Information Display (CID) com- bines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Open the Audio menu.

Opens the Phone menu.

Seite 19

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Electrically adjustable seats

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

To raise: push the head restraint up.

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- itor

3 Folding in and out

Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- red height and angle to suit your seating position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Memory function

Concept The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:

Seat position.

Exterior mirror position.

Storing 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the seat while the LED is illuminated. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings The stored position is called up automati- cally.

Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjust- ment switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat po- sition on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 Changing the waveband

2 Changing the entertainment source

3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Changing the station/track

5 Programmable memory buttons

Pairing the mobile phone After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper- ated using the Central Information Display (CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo- ken instructions.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- played on the Control Display.

Seite 21

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

5. To perform additional steps on the mo- bile phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's manual: e.g., search for or con- nect the Bluetooth device or a new de- vice.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- pears on the mobile phone display. Se- lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

6. Depending on the mobile device, a con- trol number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

Compare the control number dis- played on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will ap- pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a call Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen- tral Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Dialing a number 1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.

4. Select the symbol.

Seite 22

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

On the road

Driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition on/off

On: press the Start/Stop button.

Most of the indicator/ warning lights light up for a varied length of time.

Off: press the Start/Stop button again.

All indicator lights go out.

Radio-ready state: when the ignition is switched off, press the ON/OFF button on the radio or when the engine is run- ning, press the Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power con- sumers remain ready for operation.

Start/stop engine

Steptronic transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Steptronic transmission: switching off

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: switching off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Steptronic transmission: switches the en- gine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. The engine starts automatically when the brake pedal is released.

Manual transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de- pressed, the engine starts automatically.

Parking brake

Setting Pull the switch when the vehicle is stationary.

The LED and indicator light light up.

Releasing Manual transmission: press the switch while the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Seite 23

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Manual transmission

Shifting When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right in order to prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear.

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear- shift lever dynamically to the left and en- gage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions Parking position P.

R is reverse.

Neutral N.

Drive mode D.

Engage selector lever position P or R only when the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Selector lever lock A lock prevents an inadvertent change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position and, depending on the trans- mission version, inadvertent switching to selector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal de- pressed, press the button on the front or side of the selector lever.

Steptronic transmission, Sport and manual mode

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left from se- lector lever position D.

Manual mode:

To shift down: press the selector lever forward.

To shift up: pull the selector lever rear- wards.

High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

High beams off/headlight flasher, ar- row 2.

Seite 24

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Turn signal

On: press the lever past the resistance point.

Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist- ance point.

Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.

Brief signaling: press the lever to the re- sistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

On: with the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the re- sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Off: briefly press the lever to the resist- ance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

Resting position of the wipers: posi- tion 0.

Seite 25

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Rain sensor: position 1.

Normal wiper speed: position 2.

Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.

Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist- ance point.

Seite 26

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

To switch off normal wipe: press down once.

Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Recirculated-air mode.

Seite 27

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Button Function

Controls the air flow, manual.

Controls the air distribution manually.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/recirculated- air mode.

Controls the air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the windows.

Button Function

Windshield defroster.

Rear window defroster.

Refueling stop

Refueling

Fuel cap 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the

rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at- tached to the fuel filler flap.

Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives.

Information on the recommended fuel grade can be found in the Owner's Manual.

Seite 28

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed:

At least twice a month.

Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Electronic oil measurement

Requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, suffi- ciently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding engine oil

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Observe the quantity to be added in the message.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis- play.

Seite 29

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

29 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance This service can be reached around the clock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis- tance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Seite 30

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Seite 31

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 69

2 Exterior mirror operation 82

3 Buttons of the central locking sys- tem 57

4 Lights

Front fog lights 135

Light switch 132

Lights off

Daytime running lights 134

Parking lights 132

Low beams 132

Seite 32

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Automatic headlight con- trol 133

Cornering light 134

High-beam Assistant 134 Instrument lighting 136

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise control on/off 163

Cruise control on/off 170

Cruise control: to store the speed

Pausing, continuing cruise control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control: reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control: increase distance

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 98

High beams, head- light flasher 98

High-beam Assistant 134

Canada: roadside parking light 133

Onboard Computer 126

7 Instrument cluster 116

8 Steering column stalk, right

Wipers 99

Wiper on Canadian mod- els 103 Rain sensor 100

Rain sensor on Canadian mod- els 103 Cleaning windows 101

Rear window wiper in Cana- dian models 101

Rear window wiper 101

Clean the rear window 101

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Telephone 240

Confirm the selection 126

Selection back 126

Selection next 126

Increase volume

Reduce volume

Seite 33

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Adjusting the steering wheel 84

12 Unlocking the hood 274

13 Operate the tailgate 61

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 294

Intelligent Safety 149

2 Control Display 36

3 Radio/Multimedia

4 Glove compartment 201

5 Climate control 183

6 PDC Park Distance Con- trol 172

Rearview camera 175

Parking assistant 178 Auto Start/Stop func- tion 94

Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/ off 91 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 158

MINI Driving Modes switch 160

Seite 34

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 108

Manual transmission gearshift lever 107

8 Controller with buttons 39

9 Parking brake 96

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request, SOS 295

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas- senger airbag 141

3 Reading lights 136

4 Ambient light 136

5 Panoramic glass sunroof 71

6 Interior lights 136

Seite 35

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com- bines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be- tween entering upper and lower case let- ters, numbers and characters:

Symbol Function

Change between capital and lower-case letters.

Insert blank space.

Use voice activation.

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparison When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automati- cally.

Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle.

Only those letters are offered during entry for which data is available.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Se- lecting the menu item activates or deacti- vates the function.

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Seite 36

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Status information

General information The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status informa- tion is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being re- ceived.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net- work.

Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Other symbols

Symbol Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has been switched off.

Checking the current vehicle po- sition.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control Display

2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General information To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions, refer to page 306.

In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to in- tense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for in- stance through shade or air conditioning, the normal functions are restored.

Seite 37

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Con- trol Display can shift and damage the Con- trol Display. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automatically The Control Display is switched on automat- ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Control Display is needed for operation.

In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off manually.

1. Press the button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

Controller with navigation system

General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to se- lect menu items and enter the settings.

Operation Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

Press to select a menu item, for example.

Tilt in four directions to switch between displays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Seite 38

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Button Function

Opens destination input menu for navigation.

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to se- lect menu items and enter the settings.

Operation Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

Press to select a menu item, for example.

Tilt in two directions to switch between displays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Open the Audio menu.

Opens the Phone menu.

Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu Press the button.

Seite 39

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func- tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the Controller.

Adjusting menu contents The display of menus "Media/Radio", "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can be adjusted, for instance to remove the en- tries of functions that are not used from the menu.

Via Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the menu.

2. "Personalize menu"

3. Select desired menu contents to be dis- played.

Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears.

Move the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previ- ous display is shown.

Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

Move the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Opening recently used menus The recently used menus can be displayed.

Press the button twice.

Opening the Options menu Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for in- stance:

"Media/Radio": control options for the selected main menu.

"Save station": if applicable, further con- trol options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or

numbers.

2. : confirm entry.

Seite 40

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Deleting

Symbol Function

Press the Controller: delete letters or number.

or

Hold the Controller down: de- lete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- tries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.

2. Select the first letter of the desired en- try.

The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Programmable memory but- tons

General information The Central Information Display (CID) func- tions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance radio stations, phone numbers, and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Storing a function 1. Select the function via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired but- ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function Press the button.

The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display.

Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously

for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Seite 41

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Language

Setting the language Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Time

Setting the time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi- nutes are displayed.

8. Press the Controller.

Setting the time format Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Date

Setting the date Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Make the settings for the month and year.

Seite 42

AT A GLANCE General settings

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Setting the date format Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the units of measure- ment

You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, consumption, dis- tances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Units"

4. Select the desired menu item.

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position

Concept If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Vehicle tracking"

4. "Vehicle tracking"

5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating popup windows

For some functions, popup windows are dis- played automatically on the Control Display. Some of these popup windows can be acti- vated or deactivated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Pop-ups"

4. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Control Display

Brightness Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

Seite 43

General settings AT A GLANCE

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the light conditions, the brightness settings may not be clearly visi- ble.

Screensaver If no entries are made via the Central Infor- mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be displayed after an adjustable time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Screensaver"

6. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Messages

Concept The menu centrally displays all messages ar- riving in the vehicle in list form.

General information The following messages can be displayed:

Traffic messages.

Check Control messages.

Messages on service notifications.

Messages from the vehicle manufac- turer.

Messages are additionally displayed in the status field.

Retrieving messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

The menu in which the message is dis- played will open.

Deleting messages All messages, except Check Control mes- sages or messages from the vehicle manu- facturer, can be deleted from the list.

Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as they are relevant.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

3. Press the button.

4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications"

Adjusting The following settings can be adjusted:

Select the applications, from which mes- sages will be permitted.

Sort the messages according to date or priority.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Notifications"

4. Select the desired setting.

Seite 44

AT A GLANCE General settings

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Data protection

Data transfer

Concept The vehicle offers various functions which require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.

General information With data transfer deactivated, the respec- tive function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivating Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Concept Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently de- leted via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data is deleted:

Driver profile settings.

Stored radio stations.

Stored programmable memory buttons.

Travel and Onboard Computer informa- tion.

Phone book.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data Note and follow the instructions on the Con- trol Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. "Delete personal data"

5. "Delete personal data"

6. "OK"

7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes to complete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele- tion.

Canceling deletion Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.

Connections

Concept Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.

Seite 45

General settings AT A GLANCE

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General information The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device.

Function Connec- tion type

Making calls via the hands- free system.

Using phone functions via the Central Information Dis- play (CID).

Bluetooth.

Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player.

Bluetooth or USB.

USB storage device:

Playing music.

USB.

The following connection types require one- time pairing with the vehicle:

Bluetooth.

Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the ve- hicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth info"

6. "System information"

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements Compatible device, refer to page 46,

with Bluetooth interface.

The vehicle key is in the vehicle.

The device is ready for operation.

Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle, refer to page 46.

Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may be required on the device; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Switching on Bluetooth Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

Seite 46

AT A GLANCE General settings

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth"

Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the de- vice will be used:

"Telephone"

"Bluetooth audio"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- played on the Control Display.

6. On the mobile device, search for Blue- tooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- pears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi- cle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- trol number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

Compare the control number dis- played on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Fre- quently Asked Questions, refer to page 47.

Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected?

There are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehi- cle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec- tions with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search.

The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer re- act?

The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

Possibly too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone opera- tion.

Do not subject the mobile phone to ex- treme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)?

The mobile phone may not be properly configured, for instance as Bluetooth au- dio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the tele- phone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entries displayed or why are they incomplete?

Seite 47

General settings AT A GLANCE

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete.

It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

It may not be possible to transmit con- tacts from social networks.

The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

Data volume of the contact too large, for instance due to stored information such as notes.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

A mobile phone is only connected as an audio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and con- nect it with the telephone function.

How can the phone connection quality be improved?

The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, de- pending on the mobile phone.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not availa- ble, contact the hotline, a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

USB connection

General information The following mobile devices can be con- nected to the USB port:

Mobile phones.

Audio devices with USB port, for in- stance MP3 players.

USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

A connected USB storage device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge current of the USB port.

USB ports with data transfer can be used to play the music files via USB Audio.

Follow the following when connecting:

Do not use force when plugging the con- nector into the USB port.

Use a flexible adapter cable.

Protect the USB storage device against mechanical damage.

Due to the large number of USB storage devices available on the market, it can- not be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle.

Do not expose USB storage devices to extreme environmental conditions, such as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the me- dia stored on the USB storage device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.

To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is connected to the USB port.

Depending on how the USB storage de- vice is being used, settings may be re- quired on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

USB hard drives.

USB hubs.

USB memory card readers with multiple slots.

HFS-formatted or NTFS-formatted USB storage devices.

Devices such as fans or lamps.

Seite 48

AT A GLANCE General settings

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Functional requirement Compatible device, refer to page 46, with USB port.

Connecting the device Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port, refer to page 199.

The USB device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Managing mobile devices

General information After one-time pairing, the devices are

automatically recognized and recon- nected when the ignition is switched on.

The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle after recognition.

For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device list All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a de- vice is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Bluetooth audio"

Configuring the device Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select the desired device.

5. Select the desired setting.

If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appro- priate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device The device's connection to the vehicle is disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be con- nected again, refer to page 49.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device A disconnected device can be reconnected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the de- vice before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The func- tions may be deactivated on a device al- ready connected.

Seite 49

General settings AT A GLANCE

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Deleting the device Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.

Seite 50

AT A GLANCE General settings

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual:

Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 51.

Printed Owner's Manual

Concept The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional fea- tures offered with the series.

General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- tainment, and Communication can be ob- tained as a printed book from the service center.

Supplementary Owner's Manuals Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard literature.

Seite 51

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle key

General information The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys with integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- tery, refer to page 55.

Depending on the equipment and country version, various settings, refer to page 66, can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 65, for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance re- quirements, the service data is stored in the vehicle key, refer to page 282.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when ex- iting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock them- selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Seite 52

CONTROLS Opening and closing

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: open the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 66, the following access points are unlocked.

Driver's door and fuel filler flap.

Press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.

In addition, the following functions are exe- cuted:

Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig- nals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 66.

The settings stored in the driver profile, refer to page 65, are applied.

The driver's seat is set to the last posi- tion saved in the driver's profile. This function must be activated in the set- tings, refer to page 66.

The interior lights, refer to page 136, and the MINI logo projection are switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually.

Depending on the settings, the welcome light and pathway lighting, refer to page 133, are switched on.

Exterior mirrors folded through conven- ient closing are folded open.

The alarm system, refer to page 67, is switched off.

The light functions may depend on the am- bient brightness.

Convenient opening Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking 1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

The following functions are executed:

All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are locked.

Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be ac- tivated in the settings, refer to page 66.

The alarm system, refer to page 67, is switched on.

If the engine or ignition is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the engine or ig- nition must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

Seite 53

Opening and closing CONTROLS

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

With Comfort Access: convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key in the area close to the ve- hicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Switch on interior lights and courtesy light

Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched on.

These functions are not available if the inte- rior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the am- bient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before press- ing the button again.

Tailgate

General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be activated with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 66.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key for approx. 1 second.

Without automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

Seite 54

CONTROLS Opening and closing

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 sec- onds.

Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery 1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 57.

2. Slide the integrated key into the open- ing and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

4. Push battery in the direction of the ar- row using a pointed object and lift it out.

5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the positive side facing up.

6. Insert lid and cover.

7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys Additional vehicle keys are available from a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keys A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re- placed by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Malfunction

General information A Check Control message is displayed.

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circum- stances:

Seite 55

Opening and closing CONTROLS

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The battery of the vehicle key is dis- charged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 55.

Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with metal objects.

Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehi- cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with electronic devices.

Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 56.

Starting the engine via emergency detection of the Vehicle key

It is not possible to start the engine if the vehicle key has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark on the steering column as shown. Pay attention to the display in the instru- ment cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected:

Start the engine within 10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked Questions What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in vehicle key?

The options provided by the Remote Services of the MINI Connected app in- clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve- hicle.

This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app must be installed on a smartphone.

Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract is required.

Integrated key

General information The driver's door can be locked and un- locked without the vehicle key using the integrated key.

Safety information

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

Seite 56

CONTROLS Opening and closing

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door lock 1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un- locked via the door lock.

Buttons for the central locking system

General information In the event of a severe accident, the vehi- cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking Press the button with the front doors closed.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

Seite 57

Opening and closing CONTROLS

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Unlocking Press the button.

Opening

Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest.

Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.

Back doors: pull twice on the door han- dle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access

Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operat- ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- cle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

General information Comfort Access supports the following functions:

Unlocking and locking the vehicle.

Convenient closing.

Open the tailgate.

Opening/closing the tailgate with no- touch activation.

This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 66.

This function is not available in vehicles with a trailer hitch or with a rear lug- gage rack preparation.

Functional requirements To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must

be outside of the vehicle near the doors.

The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 sec- onds.

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 66, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking using the vehicle key, pressing the button on the outer door han- dle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again.

If the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or with the button of the central locking system from the inside, note the fol- lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is opened from the inside with the door opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle will first lock the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door han- dle must be pressed again.

Seite 58

CONTROLS Opening and closing

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driv- er's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

To open the tailgate

General information If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Seite 59

Opening and closing CONTROLS

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Opening

Press button next on tailgate.

Without automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

With automatic tailgate actuation: touchless opening and closing of tailgate

Concept The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-touch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for- ward-directed foot motion in the central rear area and the tailgate is opened or closed.

General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

This function is not available in vehicles with a trailer hitch or with a rear luggage rack preparation.

If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the tailgate may open or close inadvertently if you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot movement is detected.

The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehicle.

If the tailgate is opened with no-touch acti- vation, locked doors are not unlocked.

Contactless opening and closing of the tail- gate must be activated in the settings.

Safety information

Warning

During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas system. There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do not touch the vehicle.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Adjusting 1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Tailgate"

5. Select the desired setting:

"Open by foot movement"

Seite 60

CONTROLS Opening and closing

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Contactless opening of the tailgate is switched on or off.

"Close by foot movement"

Contactless closing of the tailgate is switched on or off.

Performing the foot movement 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle

at approx. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di- rection of travel and immediately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors.

Opening Perform the foot movement described ear- lier.

Before the opening, the hazard warning sys- tem flashes.

If touchless closing is switched on:

Moving a foot again will stop the opening process.

The subsequent foot movement will close the tailgate again.

Closing Perform the foot movement described ear- lier.

Before closing, the hazard warning system flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.

Moving a foot again will stop the closing process.

When the touchless opening is switched on: the subsequent foot movement will open the tailgate again.

Malfunction Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circum- stances:

The battery of the vehicle key is dis- charged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 55.

Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with metal objects.

Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehi- cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve- hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to page 56.

Tailgate

General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the

Seite 61

Opening and closing CONTROLS

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

tailgate can be activated with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 66.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Without automatic tailgate operation

Opening from the outside

Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press button next on tailgate.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve- hicle key, refer to page 54.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door upwards.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door upwards twice in quick suc- cession.

Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

Seite 62

CONTROLS Opening and closing

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

With automatic tailgate operation

Opening

Adjusting the opening height

You can set how far the tailgate should open.

When adjusting the opening height, ensure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Tailgate"

5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired opening height.

From the outside

Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking using the vehicle key, refer to page 54.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted opening height.

From the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

Pull button in the storage compart- ment of the driver's door upward.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door upwards twice in quick suc- cession.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted opening height.

Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the following situations:

When the vehicle starts moving.

By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By pressing the button on the vehicle key. Pressing again continues the open- ing motion.

By pressing or pulling the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door. Pulling again continues the open- ing motion.

Closing

From the outside

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

Seite 63

Opening and closing CONTROLS

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

From the inside

Press and hold the button in the stor- age compartment of the driver's door.

The vehicle key must be located in the cars interior for this function.

An acoustic signal sounds before the tail- gate is closed.

From inside the tailgate

Without Comfort Access:

Press the button on the inside of the tail- gate.

With Comfort Access:

Press button on the inside of the tail- gate, arrow 1.

Press button, arrow 2.

The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate.

Interruption of the closing procedure

The closing procedure is interrupted in the following situations:

If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.

By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By releasing the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door. Press- ing again and holding continues the closing motion.

Malfunction

Safety information

Warning

With manual operation of a blocked tail- gate, it can release itself unexpectedly from the blockage. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not oper- ate the tailgate manually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a dealers service cen- ter or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Manual operation

Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and smooth motion.

To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly only. Closing occurs automatically.

Seite 64

CONTROLS Opening and closing

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driver profiles

Concept In the driver profiles, individual settings for several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

General information There are three driver profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev- ery vehicle key has been assigned one of these driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle key, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehicle keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set- tings as it is being unlocked. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key.

Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently acti- vated.

Functional requirements For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the detected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

The driver is only carrying his or her own vehicle key.

The driver unlocks the vehicle.

The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.

Adjusting The settings for the following systems and functions are stored in the active profile.

The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment.

Unlocking and locking.

Lights.

Radio.

Instrument cluster.

Programmable memory buttons.

Volumes, tone.

Control Display.

Climate control.

PDC Park Distance Control.

Rearview camera.

MINI Driving Modes.

Intelligent Safety.

Driver's seat position, exterior mirror position.

Both the positions saved via the seat memory and the last position set are saved.

System limits A clear assignment between the vehicle key and driver may not be possible in the fol- lowing cases, for example.

The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own vehicle key, but another person is driving.

The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com- fort Access and has multiple vehicle keys with him or her.

The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.

Multiple vehicle keys are located out- side of the vehicle.

Seite 65

Opening and closing CONTROLS

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting

General information Depending on the package and country ver- sion, various settings are available for the vehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver pro- file, refer to page 65, currently used.

Unlocking

Doors Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"

5. Select the desired setting:

"Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.

"All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4.

The text next to the symbol indicates the current setting.

5. Select the desired setting:

"Tailgate"

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the tailgate is either un- locked or opened.

"Tailgate and door(s)"

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the tailgate is either un- locked or opened and the doors un- locked.

"Tailgate opens after unlocking"

The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the ve- hicle key.

"Button lock"

It is not possible to use the tailgate via the vehicle key.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, this setting may not be of- fered.

Automatic locking Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Select the desired setting:

"Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after un- locking.

"Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Automatic unlocking Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the

Seite 66

CONTROLS Opening and closing

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

locked vehicle is automatically un- locked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Deactivate or activate the desired con- firmation signals.

"Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one.

With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Alarm system

General information When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes:

Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.

Movements in the car's interior.

Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.

Disconnected battery voltage.

Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the socket for the OBD On- board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 283.

The alarm system signals these changes vis- ually and acoustically:

Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

Visual alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning sys- tem and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure func- tion of the alarm system.

Overview

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/off The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi- cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 68.

Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on.

Seite 67

Opening and closing CONTROLS

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 sec- onds.

Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator lights The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor- rectly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

The indicator light goes out after un- locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator light flashes after unlock- ing until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi- nutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un- authorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

In automatic vehicle washes.

In duplex garages.

During transport on trains carrying ve- hicles, at sea or on a trailer.

With animals in the vehicle.

When the vehicle is locked after start of fueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo- tion sensor can be switched off in such sit- uations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.

Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and switch on the ignition using the

Seite 68

CONTROLS Opening and closing

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

emergency detection of the vehicle key, refer to page 55.

With Comfort Access: if you have the vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door.

Power windows

General information If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed ex- cept a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Power windows.

Safety switch.

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point.

The window opens while the switch is being held.

Press the switch beyond the resist- ance point.

The window opens automatically. Press- ing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 53.

Closing

Pull the switch to the resistance point.

The window closes while the switch is being held.

Pull the switch beyond the resist- ance point.

The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re- fer to page 54.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 59.

Jam protection system

Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.

General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

Seite 69

Opening and closing CONTROLS

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The window opens slightly.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as an- tennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam pro- tection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is inter- rupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protec- tion.

Safety switch

General information The safety switch can be used to prevent children, for instance from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the safety function is switched off automati- cally.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED lights up if the safety func- tion is switched on.

Malfunction

General information In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent.

After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case.

The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a win- dow is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the over- heating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the de- gree of overheating, it may only be pos- sible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.

Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the ve- hicle is stationary and the engine is run- ning.

During initialization, the affected window closes without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of

Seite 70

CONTROLS Opening and closing

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

the windows is clear during opening and closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistance point and hold.

The window closes.

3. Continue holding the switch pulled to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend- ing on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General information In the event of a severe accident, the glass sunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroof Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and re- lease it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Slide switch back to the re- sistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

Press the switch back beyond the resist- ance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- tion.

Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the auto- matic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glass sunroof fully.

Seite 71

Opening and closing CONTROLS

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.

Press the switch forward beyond the re- sistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- tion.

Press the switch forward beyond the re- sistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- tion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Press the switch forward be- yond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun- roof is closing.

General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos- ing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resist- ance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force ex- ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in- terrupted.

2. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power interruption After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI rec- ommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop.

Seite 72

CONTROLS Opening and closing

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat- ing position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters:

Seats, refer to page 73.

Safety belts, refer to page 77.

Head restraints, refer to page 79.

Airbags, refer to page 138.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi- cle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driv- er's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid- ing under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Manually adjustable seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Seite 73

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de- sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for- ward or back slightly making sure it en- gages properly.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lum- bar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or de- crease the curvature.

Electrically adjustable seats

General information The current seat position can be stored us- ing the memory function, refer to page 81.

Overview

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Seite 74

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Forward/backward

Push switch forward or backward.

Height

Push switch up or down.

Seat tilt

Move switch up or down.

Backrest tilt

Move switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support

Concept

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lum- bar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Adjusting

Press the front/rear sec- tion of the button:

The curvature is in- creased/decreased.

Press the upper/lower sec- tion of the button:

The curvature is shifted up/down.

Seite 75

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad- just the thigh support.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on

Press the button once for each tem- perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti- vated automatically with the temperature selected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to page 218, the heating output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button until the LEDs go out.

Rear seats

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when folding down the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the center armrest is clear during folding down.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur due to unintentional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by the straps. There is a risk of injury. Only use straps for releasing the rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects on the straps.

Forward/backward

General information The rear seat is divided at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left seat is connected to the center section.

Seite 76

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de- sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for- ward or back slightly making sure it en- gages properly.

Backrest tilt

Pull the strap and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

After the adjustment, move the backrest slightly forward or back to engage it cor- rectly.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safety belt buckles The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted cor- rectly.

The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right.

The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is intended for the person sitting in the middle.

General information Always make sure that safety belts are be- ing worn by all occupants before driving off. Although airbags enhance safety by provid- ing added protection, they are not a substi- tute for safety belts.

If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear from the belt buckle on the side.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the abil- ity of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or dan- ger to life. Do not allow more than one per- son to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occu- pant's lap, but must be transported and se- cured in designated child restraint sys- tems.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or

Seite 77

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

danger to life. Make sure that all occu- pants are wearing safety belts correctly.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations:

The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.

Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten- sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight

to your body over your lap and should- ers.

Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach.

Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.

Avoid thick clothing.

Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up- ward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over

shoulder and hip to put it on.

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll- up mechanism.

Middle safety belt in the rear

Buckling the safety belt

1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts in the roof.

2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 1.

3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 2.

Safety belt buckles must audibly click into place.

Seite 78

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open the second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.

4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the roofliner.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be acti- vated if objects are placed on the front pas- senger seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re- moved or not correctly adjusted head re- straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.

Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use seat or head restraint cov- ers.

Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.

Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.

Do not use any accessories, for in- stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John Cooper Works sport seat The height of the head restraints cannot be set.

Seite 79

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting the height

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing: John Cooper Works sport seat The head restraints cannot be removed.

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest forward.

2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re- moved or not correctly adjusted head re- straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.

Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use seat or head restraint cov- ers.

Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.

Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.

Do not use any accessories, for in- stance pillows, while driving.

Seite 80

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting the height

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Fold down

To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, ar- row 2.

Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages cor- rectly.

Removing The head restraints cannot be removed.

Memory function

Concept The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:

Seat position.

Exterior mirror position.

General information Different settings can be assigned to two memory locations.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored.

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Warning

Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the mem- ory function when the vehicle is station- ary.

Seite 81

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Storing 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings The stored position is called up automati- cally.

Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjust- ment switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat po- sition on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.

Call up deactivated After a brief period, calling up stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power.

To reactivate calling up of a seat position:

Open or close the door or tailgate.

Press a button on the vehicle key.

Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 81.

Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traf- fic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Overview

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- itor

3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Seite 82

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir- ror glass.

Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi- cle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Be- fore washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap- prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations:

In vehicle washes.

On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the ignition is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror, refer to page 84, are used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted down- ward. This improves your view of the curb and other formatting issue - low-lying ob- stacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir- ror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward.

Seite 83

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

In the mirror glass.

On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements Keep the photocells clean.

Do not cover the area between the inte- rior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the vehicle is sta- tionary only.

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- red height and angle to suit your seating position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 84

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

A heated vehicle may result in death to persons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave persons, especially children, or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their compo- nents to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehi- cle.

Always transport children in the rear seat

General information Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

Seite 85

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The safety belt cannot be fastened cor- rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened in- correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in- stance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- juries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General information Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passen- ger side are deactivated. For automatic de- activation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 140.

Safety information

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- jure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front- seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- tor light lights up.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint sys- tems

General information Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child re- straint systems.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint sys- tems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an acci- dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an acci- dent.

If a child restraint system and its fasten- ing system has been damaged or exposed to an accident, have these systems checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-

Seite 86

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

On the rear seats If the vehicle is equipped with a sliding rear seat row: move the seats to the rearmost po- sition before mounting a child restraint sys- tem.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- jure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front- seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- tor light lights up.

Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 140.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat care- fully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passen- ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com- pletely.

Seite 87

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

In some cases it may be necessary to sepa- rate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, refer to page 77.

LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil- dren.

Pay attention to the operating and safety in- formation from the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com- bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys- tems are not correctly engaged, the protec- tive effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely en- gaged and that the LATCH child restraint fixing system fits securely against the backrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.

For vehicles equipped with a middle seat:

It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle safety belt instead for the middle seat.

Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Install child restraint system, see manu-

facturer's information.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly engaged.

Seite 88

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Child restraint systems with tether strap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor.

Warning

If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro- tective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situa- tions, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked.

NOTICE

The anchors for the upper retaining straps of child restraint systems are only pro- vided for these retaining straps. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only mount child restraint systems to the upper anchors.

Anchors

The respective symbol shows the an- chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.

2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain- ing strap between or along both sides of the supports of the head restraint to the anchor.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

Seite 89

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Locking the doors and win- dows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out- side only.

Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door if children are being trans- ported in the rear.

This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 70.

Seite 90

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Start/Stop button

Concept Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: the engine starts in selector lever

position P or N with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: the engine starts with the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/ Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button without stepping on the clutch pedal.

Steptronic transmission: press the Start/ Stop button, but do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unneces- sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition off Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the clutch pedal.

Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever position P, press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unneces- sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Safety measures The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is off:

When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are switched on.

Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only availa- ble when the low beams are switched off.

When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is un- buckled and the low beams are switched off.

While the driver's safety belt is unbuck- led with driver's door open and low beams off.

When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.

Seite 91

Driving CONTROLS

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The low beams switch to parking lights after some minutes of no use.

Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated selector lever, refer to page 108: when switching off the ignition, the selector lever position P is engaged automatically if the selector lever position R, D or M/S is en- gaged.

Radio-ready state

General information In the radio-ready state, certain power con- sumers remain ready for operation.

Activating With the engine running, press the Start/ Stop button.

If the engine is not running and the ignition is switched on: the system automatically ac- tivates radio-ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.

Radio-ready state remains active if, for in- stance the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons:

Opening or closing the driver's door.

Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights.

Switching off automatically The radio-ready state is switched off auto- matically in the following situations:

If the driver's or front passenger door is opened when exiting the vehicle, with the engine switched off manually.

If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button.

After approx. 8 minutes.

When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.

Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.

Starting the engine

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila- tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are color- less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex- haust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

In the case of repeated starting attempts or repeated starting in quick succession, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned. The catalytic converter can over-

Seite 92

CONTROLS Driving

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

heat. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in quick succes- sion.

Gasoline engine Depending on the motorization, the full drive power may not be available for ap- proximately 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac- celerate as usual.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the en- gine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the en- gine starts.

Engine stop

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Seite 93

Driving CONTROLS

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Steptronic transmission

Switching off the engine 1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply

the parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic conges- tion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts automati- cally for driving off.

After each engine start using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready and is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h.

Depending on the selected driving mode, re- fer to page 160, the system is automatically activated or deactivated.

Engine stop

Functional requirements The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following condi- tions:

Manual transmission:

Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed.

The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

Steptronic transmission:

The selector lever is in selector lever po- sition D.

The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped.

The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brake pedal, engage the selector lever in position P. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts automatically.

The air flow from the air conditioner is re- duced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.

Seite 94

CONTROLS Driving

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Functional limitations The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:

External temperature too low.

The external temperature is high and au- tomatic climate control is running.

The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.

The engine is not yet at operating tem- perature.

The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.

After driving in reverse.

Fogging of the windows when the auto- matic climate control is switched on.

The vehicle battery charge is very low.

At higher elevations.

The hood is unlocked.

The parking assistant is activated.

Stop-and-go traffic.

Selector lever in selector lever position R, N or M/S.

Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the following conditions:

Manual transmission: clutch pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: by releasing the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met:

The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.

The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time.

The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

Functional limitations Even if driving off was not intended, the de- activated engine starts up automatically in the following situations:

Excessive warming of the car's interior when the air conditioning is switched on.

When the steering wheel is turned.

Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.

The vehicle begins rolling.

Fogging of the windows when the auto- matic climate control is switched on.

The vehicle battery charge is very low.

Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on.

Manual transmission: low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur, for instance if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession.

Additional Auto Start/Stop function Depending on the vehicle equipment and country-specific version, the vehicle fea- tures a variety of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop func- tion uses this information to adapt to vari- ous traffic situations in a proactive manner.

For instance, this applies to the following situations:

When a situation is detected in which the stopping time is expected to be very short, the engine is not switched off au-

Seite 95

Driving CONTROLS

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

tomatically. A message appears on the Control Display, depending on the situa- tion.

When a situation is detected in which the vehicle needs to drive off immedi- ately, the engine is started automati- cally.

The function may be restricted if the navi- gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail- able, for example.

Switching the system on/off

Using the button

Press the button.

LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

The engine is started during an auto- matic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehi- cle can be switched off permanently, for in- stance when leaving it.

Steptronic transmission:

1. Engage selector lever position P.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission:

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, for instance if no driver is detected.

Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the sys- tem checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

Concept The parking brake is used to prevent the ve- hicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

Seite 96

CONTROLS Driving

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically.

Steptronic transmission: in some parking situations, the parking brake is automati- cally engaged, when selector lever posi- tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park- ing brake is released automatically when you leave the selector lever position P.

While driving To use as emergency brake while driving:

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator light lights up red, a signal sounds and the brake lights light up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Manual transmission: press the switch while the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or se- lector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

Seite 97

Driving CONTROLS

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars with Steptronic transmission For automatic release, step on the accelera- tor pedal.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator under the following conditions:

Engine on.

Drive mode engaged.

Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Automatic release in cars with manual transmission Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen- gages when the clutch pedal is released.

The LED and indicator light go out.

Under the following conditions, the parking brake is automatically released:

Engine on.

Gear engaged.

Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Engine power is sufficient to drive off.

Malfunction If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure the vehicle against rolling before ex- iting.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for instance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehicle.

After a power failure

Re-activating the parking brake 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever posi- tion P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as- sociated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the park- ing brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams, head- light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off man- ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be ad- justed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

Seite 98

CONTROLS Driving

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "One-touch turn signal"

6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Malfunction Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

High beams off/headlight flasher, ar- row 2.

Wiper system

General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

Resting position of the wipers, posi- tion 0.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor, position 1.

Normal wiper speed, position 2.

Fast wiper speed, position 3.

Seite 99

Driving CONTROLS

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.

Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its in- itial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the in- tensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, di- rectly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

Deactivating Press the lever back into the standard posi- tion.

Seite 100

CONTROLS Driving

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win- dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti- freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on Turn the outer switch upward.

Resting position of the wiper, posi- tion 0.

Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- verse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- tion.

Seite 101

Driving CONTROLS

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch auto- matically returns to its idle position when released.

In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automati- cally returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un- til the wipers stop in a close to vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Seite 102

CONTROLS Driving

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Canada: wiper system

General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist- ance point.

Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice.

To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once.

Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the in- tensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, di- rectly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Seite 103

Driving CONTROLS

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen- sor switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically activated again.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win- dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti- freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Seite 104

CONTROLS Driving

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on Turn the outer switch upward.

Resting position of the wiper, posi- tion 0.

Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- verse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- tion.

In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch auto- matically returns to its idle position when released.

In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automati- cally returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press the wiper lever up past the point of resistance and hold it for approx.

Seite 105

Driving CONTROLS

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Washer fluid

General information All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield

washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some antifreeze agents can contain harm- ful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ra- tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allow- able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.

Use of BMWs Windshield Washer Con- centrate or the equivalent is recom- mended.

Warning

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- erty. Only add washer fluid when the en- gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the wash- ing system. There is a risk of damage to

Seite 106

CONTROLS Driving

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

property. Do not add silicon-containing ad- ditives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer con- centrates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not mix different wind- shield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

Malfunction The use of undiluted windshield washer concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 /-15 .

Manual transmission

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

When shifting to a lower gear, excessive speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.

Schematic diagram

16: forward gears.

R: reverse gear.

Shifting

General information Depending on the engine installation, the engine speed during a shifting operation is adjusted automatically as required for har- monious and dynamic gear shifting.

Seite 107

Driving CONTROLS

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear- shift lever dynamically to the left and en- gage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a forward gear or reverse.

3. Release the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission

Concept The Steptronic transmission combines the functions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Selector lever version

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, a transmission with either a latching selector lever or a tap-operated selector lever is in- stalled.

Transmission with a latching selector lever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are selected by moving the selector lever into the respective selector lever position. The selector lever engages in the selector lever positions.

Transmission with a tap-operated selector lever

The selector lever positions R, N, and D are selected by tapping the selector lever for-

Seite 108

CONTROLS Driving

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

ward or back. The selector lever automati- cally returns to the center position when re- leased.

The selector lever position P is engaged by pressing the P button on the selector lever or, in certain situations, automatically, refer to page 109.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode D Selector lever position for normal vehicle operation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

R is reverse Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.

Neutral N The vehicle may be pushed or roll without engine power in selector lever position N, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 111.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.

Automatic parking position for a transmission with a tap-operated selector lever

Selector lever position P is engaged auto- matically in situations such as the follow- ing:

After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to page 92, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 91, while se- lector lever position R, D or M/S is en- gaged.

If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the ve- hicle is stationary and selector lever po- sition D, M/S or R is engaged.

After the ignition has been switched off while selector lever position N is en- gaged.

Engaging selector lever positions: with a latching selector lever

General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Functional requirements The selector lever can only be taken out of selector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running.

Engaging selector lever position D, N, R, or P With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be deactivated and the shift command will not be executed.

Seite 109

Driving CONTROLS

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation:

Unintentional shifting into selector lever position P or R.

Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.

1. To release the selector lever lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the front of the selector lever.

2. Move the selector lever into the desired position.

Engaging selector lever positions: with a tap-operated selector lever

General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Functional requirements Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever posi- tion P to another selector lever position.

Depending on the transmission version, the engine may have to be running too.

The selection lever position P cannot be changed until all technical requirements are met.

Engaging selector lever position D, N, R A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation:

Unintentional shifting into selector lever position R.

Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.

1. Press and hold the button to release the selector lever lock.

2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the de- sired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automati-

Seite 110

CONTROLS Driving

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

cally returns to the center position when released.

Engaging selector lever position P

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N: with a latching selector lever 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Touch the selector lever lock and en- gage selector lever position N.

5. Release brake.

The vehicle can roll.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position.

Manually unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 114.

Engaging selector lever position N: with a tap-operated selector lever 1. Start the engine while pressing on the

brake pedal.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Touch the selector lever lock and en- gage selector lever position N.

5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check Control mes- sage is displayed.

The vehicle can roll.

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch ignition off in vehicle washes.

Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever position P is automatically engaged af- ter approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 114.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv- ing performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Seite 111

Driving CONTROLS

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Sport program M/S

Concept The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driving style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.

Activating the Sport program

Press the selector lever to the left from se- lector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru- ment cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is ac- tivated.

Ending the Sport program Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

Concept Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.

Activating manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left from

selector lever position D, arrow 1.

2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru- ment cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting To shift down: press the selector lever

forward.

To shift up: pull the selector lever rear- wards.

The Steptronic transmission continues shifting automatically in certain situations, for instance when certain engine speed lim- its are reached.

With a tap-operated selector lever: when M2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta- tionary, the transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is retained until you engage M1 manually or exit M.

Avoiding automatic upshifting Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically up- shifted as needed.

John Cooper Works: once particular engine speeds are attained, upshifting is not auto- matically performed in M/S manual mode.

Seite 112

CONTROLS Driving

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis- sion, automatic shift operations are not per- formed if one of the following conditions is met:

DSC is deactivated.

TRACTION is activated.

In addition, there is no downshifting for kickdown.

With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simultaneously activating kickdown and op- erating the left shift paddles. This is not possible by switching briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever position D to manual mode M/S.

Ending the manual mode Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission

Concept The shift paddles on the steering wheel al- low you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.

General information

Shifting

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en- gine and road speeds, for instance down- shifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode temporarily.

After conservative driving in manual mode without acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the

transmission switches back to automatic mode.

It is possible to switch into automatic mode as follows:

Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

In addition to the pulled right shift pad- dle, pull the left shift paddle.

Continuous manual mode

In selector lever position S, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode perma- nently.

Shifting

Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.

Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.

Downshifting to the lowest possible gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is displayed, for example P.

Seite 113

Driving CONTROLS

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Releasing the transmission lock manually: with a latching selector lever If the selector lever is locked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being switched on, the brake pedal being de- pressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed, the transmission lock can be unlocked manually:

Before unlocking the transmission lock manually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to- gether with the lower retaining ring, from the center console. To do so, pull the retaining ring upward at the rear edge.

2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec- tor, if needed.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 284, press the yellow release lever downward, see arrow.

4. Press the button on the front of the se- lector lever and move the selector lever back slightly.

Release the release lever.

5. Bring the selector lever into the desired position.

For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.

Releasing the transmission lock electronically: with a tap-operated selector lever

General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position N Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the engine.

1. Press and hold down brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start.

3. Press the button on the selector lever, arrow 1, and press and hold the selector lever into selector lever position N, ar- row N, until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 114

CONTROLS Driving

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

4. Release the selector lever.

5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own.

For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.

Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control

Concept Launch Control enables optimum accelera- tion on surfaces with good traction under dry surrounding conditions.

General information The use of Launch Control causes prema- ture component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 212, period.

Do not turn the steering wheel when driv- ing away with Launch Control.

Functional requirements Launch Control is available as soon as the engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

Depending on the external temperature and driving style, the engine and transmission require an interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper- ating temperature needed for Launch Con- trol.

Start with launch control While the engine is running:

1. Press button and select SPORT with the MINI Driving Modes switch.

The instrument cluster displays TRAC- TION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator light lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.

4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown.

A flag symbol is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait briefly until the engine speed is con- stant. Keep accelerator pedal in this po- sition.

6. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the flag symbol illuminates.

The vehicle accelerates.

Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the flag symbol is displayed and the accelerator pedal is not released.

Repeated use during a trip After Launch Control has been used, the transmission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes before Launch Control can be used again.

After using Launch Control To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dynamic Stability Control again.

System limits An experienced driver may be able to ach- ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

Seite 115

Driving CONTROLS

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 121

2 Indicator/warning lights

3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 121

5 Display/reset miles 121

6 Electronic displays 117

Seite 116

CONTROLS Displays

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 122

External temperature 122

Selection lists 126

Total miles/trip odometer 121

Onboard Computer 126

2 Selector lever position 108

Gear shift indicator 124

3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta- tus 160

Check Control

Concept The Check Control system monitors func- tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal- functions in the monitored systems.

General information A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be out- put and a SMS text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Seite 117

Displays CONTROLS

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illumi- nated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The

safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are posi- tioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner may not be working.

Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, re- fer to page 97.

Brake system

Braking system impaired. Continue to drive moderately.

Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a

collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Increase the distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the ve- hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela- tively high differential speed.

Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Person warning

If a collision with a detected person is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer to page 163.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes: the condi- tions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until the driver actively resumes control of the vehicle by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System ABS

The Brake Assistant function may not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance into account.

Seite 118

CONTROLS Displays

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC con- trols the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal- functioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 158.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti- vated.

DSC, refer to page 158, and DTC, re- fer to page 159.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The FTM signals a loss of tire infla- tion pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau- tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 146.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.

Follow the information in the Check Control message.

The indicator light flashes and is then illu- minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres- sure losses cannot be detected.

Interference caused by systems or devi- ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.

A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a deal- ers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 142.

Steering system

Steering system may not be working.

Have the system checked by a deal- er's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Emissions

The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Seite 119

Displays CONTROLS

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 283.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indi- cator light indicates that a turn sig-

nal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 98.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are switched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 132.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on.

Front fog lights, refer to page 135.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traf-

fic situation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 134.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It main- tains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering

wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on.

High beams, refer to page 99.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous display Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several mal- functions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis- played again automatically.

Temporary display Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Seite 120

CONTROLS Displays

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored.

SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Depending on the Check Control message, further help can be selected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the desired text message.

5. Select the desired setting.

Messages after trip completion Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Fuel gauge

Concept The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis- played.

General information Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 248.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Indicator light in the instrument cluster

The yellow indicator light illumi- nates, once the fuel reserve is reached.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.

Odometer and trip odometer

Concept The total mileage driven and the mileage driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 121

Displays CONTROLS

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Instrument cluster without additional functions: reset trip distance

Press the button.

The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.

When the ignition is switched on, the trip od- ometer is reset.

External temperature

General information If the indicator drops to +37 /+3 , a sig- nal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 there can be a risk of icy roads, for in- stance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather condi- tions at low temperatures.

Display The external temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Time

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Set the time on the Central In- formation Display (CID), refer to page 42.

Date

The date is displayed in the in- strument cluster.

Set the date on the Central In- formation Display (CID), refer to page 42.

Range

General information When the remaining range is low:

A Check Control message is displayed briefly.

The remaining range is shown on the Onboard Computer.

With a dynamic driving style, for in- stance fast cornering, the engine func- tion is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears contin- uously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Seite 122

CONTROLS Displays

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Display The current range is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Displaying the cruising range Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Range"

Current consumption

Concept Displays the current fuel consumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current consumption Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Current consumption"

Service notifications

Concept The function displays the service notifica- tions and the corresponding maintenance scopes.

General information After the ignition is switched on the instru- ment cluster briefly displays available driv- ing distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance.

A service advisor can read out the current service notifications from your vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on service notifications More information on the type of service re- quired may be displayed on the Control Dis- play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Maintenance and service measures and legally mandated inspections are dis- played.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor- mation.

Seite 123

Displays CONTROLS

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re- quired.

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is ap- proaching.

The service deadline has al- ready passed.

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "Vehicle inspection"

5. "Date:"

6. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automati- cally transmitted to your dealers service center before your vehicle is due for serv- ice.

You can check when your dealers service center was notified.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Teleservice Call"

Gear shift indicator

Concept The system recommends the most efficient gear for the current driving situation.

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to shift up or down are dis- played in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment version, shift to a more effi- cient gear.

Steptronic transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment version, shift to a more effi- cient gear.

Seite 124

CONTROLS Displays

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

Concept Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi- mum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

General information The camera at the base of the interior mir- ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road con- ditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

Without a navigation system, the system is subject to limitations imposed by technol- ogy. Traffic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limita- tions due to entering or exiting towns, high- way signs, etc. are not displayed. Speed lim- its with extra text characters are always displayed.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Display Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instrument cluster or via the Onboard Com- puter.

Press button on the turn signal lever several times, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

Seite 125

Displays CONTROLS

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out after curves or longer stretches of roadway.

Without navigation system: no speed limit or cancellation is detected.

System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

When traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint.

When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.

When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections.

When the windshield in front of the in- terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered by a sticker, etc.

In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.

When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.

If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the dis- play in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following:

Current audio source.

Phone redial.

Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button on the steering wheel

Function

Move selection up.

Move selection down.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Onboard Computer

Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values.

Seite 126

CONTROLS Displays

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Calling up information

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the but- ton on the turn signal lever calls up the following informa- tion:

Range.

GREEN Info.

When GREEN Mode is activated.

Average consumption, fuel.

Average consumption since delivery from the factory.

Current consumption, fuel.

Average speed.

Date.

Engine temperature display.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Speed Limit Info.

Vehicle speed.

The unit of some information can be changed.

Setting units, refer to page 43.

Selecting information Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select what information from the On- board Computer can be accessed in the in- strument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range avail- able with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driv- ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN info The achieved range extension may be dis- played as a bonus range.

Average consumption The average consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running.

The average consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the Onboard Computer.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not in- cluded in the calculation of the average speed.

Seite 127

Displays CONTROLS

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Resetting average values

Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever.

Engine temperature display

Concept

The current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and engine oil tem- perature is displayed. As soon as the opti- mum operating temperature has been at- tained, the indicator is in the center position.

General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en- gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes- sage is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is too high, a red indicator light is dis- played.

When the engine oil temperature is too high, a red indicator light is dis- played.

To check the coolant level, refer to page 280.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Instrument cluster without additional functions: Speed Limit Info Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi- mum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

Onboard Computer on the Control Display

Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

General information Two types of Onboard Computers are availa- ble on the Control Display:

"Onboard info": average values, such as the consumption, are displayed. The val- ues can be reset individually.

"Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a specific route and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Seite 128

CONTROLS Displays

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Resetting the Onboard Computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info"

4. "Consumption" or "Speed"

5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.

"Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi- cle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement

Concept On the Control Display, sport instruments can be displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked before the use of the SPORT program.

Sport instruments

General information On the Control Display, values for power and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "Sport displays"

4. "Sports instruments"

Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Sports instruments"

Speed warning

Concept A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued.

General information The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Adjusting Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Warning at:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

Seite 129

Displays CONTROLS

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central in- strument cluster

Concept The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.

Basic displays Basic functions, for instance the tachome- ter, can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.

Event displays Functions that are only displayed tempora- rily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis- play corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer Like the tachometer in the instrument clus- ter, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respective RPM warning thresholds.

Display

Arrow 1: current RPM.

Arrow 2: prewarning field.

Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Basic display" or "Event display"

6. Select the desired setting.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Displays

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Setting the brightness The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Vehicle status

General information The status can be displayed and actions per- formed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle status Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance

Symbols Description

"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the run-flat tires, refer to page 146.

"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta- tus of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 142.

Symbols Description

"Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil level check, refer to page 276.

"Check Control": Check Con- trol messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Check Control messages, re- fer to page 120.

"Service required": display- ing service notifications, re- fer to page 123.

"Teleservice Call": Serv- ice Request.

Seite 131

Displays CONTROLS

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel.

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Symbol Function

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights

General information Position of switch: , ,

If the driver's door is opened when the igni- tion is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off.

Parking lights Position of switch:

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.

Canada: when parking, switch on the one- sided roadside parking light, refer to page 133.

Low beams Position of switch:

The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on.

Seite 132

CONTROLS Lights

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Canada: roadside parking light

Concept The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resist- ance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and pathway lighting

Welcome lights

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating Position of switch: ,

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Pathway lighting

General information The low beams stay illuminated for a partic- ular time if the high beams are switched on after radio-ready state is switched off.

Canada: the low beams stay illuminated for a particular time if the headlight flasher is switched on after radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Pathway lighting"

6. Set length of time.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic headlight control

Concept The low beams are switched on and off au- tomatically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi- light or if there is precipitation.

General information A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

Seite 133

Lights CONTROLS

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Activating Position of switch:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

System limits The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg- ment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to de- tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa- tions, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General information Position of switch: , ,

The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. After the igni- tion is switched off, the parking lights light up in position .

Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the currently used vehicle key.

Cornering light

General information Position of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountain- ous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering an- gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig- nals.

When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on re- gardless of the steering angle.

Adaptive headlight range con- trol

The adaptive headlight range control fea- ture balances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load condi- tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

High-beam Assistant

Concept The high-beam Assistant detects other traf- fic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depend- ing on the traffic situation.

General information The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

Seite 134

CONTROLS Lights

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The system responds to light from oncom- ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.

The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch, depending on the vehicle equipment: ,

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switched between low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instru- ment cluster lights up when the sys- tem switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 99.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judg- ment of when to use the high beams. In sit- uation that require this, therefore switch off manually.

The system is not fully functional in the fol- lowing situations, and driver intervention may be necessary:

In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.

When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres- sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob- scured oncoming traffic on highways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs.

When the windshield in front of the in- terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

Concept The front fog lights work alongside the low beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.

Functional requirement The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The green indicator light lights up if the front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 133, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights.

Seite 135

Lights CONTROLS

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Adjusting Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour- tesy lights are controlled automatically.

The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls brightness of some of these fea- tures.

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lights

3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and off manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.

Ambient light

General information Depending on the equipment version, light- ing can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.

Changing color

Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or back- ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until the ambient light illuminates

Seite 136

CONTROLS Lights

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

several times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment, the bright- ness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 137

Lights CONTROLS

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag In the event of a side impact, the side air- bag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Seite 138

CONTROLS Safety

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Head airbag In the event of a side impact, the head air- bag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to re- duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, for instance in less severe acci- dents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of the airbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the de- ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protec- tion as intended and may cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in- formation on achieving the optimum pro- tective effect of the airbag system.

Keep a distance from the airbags.

Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.

Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.

There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.

Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for in- stance for GPS devices or mobile phones.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not place seat cushions or other ob- jects on the front seats that are not spe- cifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

Never modify either the individual com- ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys- tem. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.

Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa- tions.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with dis- abilities may affect the air bag system; con-

Seite 139

Safety CONTROLS

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

tact MINI Customer Relations for further in- formation.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to fail- ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger- ing of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan- ger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap- ped by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby

indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning Warning light does not come on when

the ignition is switched on.

The warning light lights up continu- ously.

Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags

Concept The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deacti- vated.

General information Before transporting a child on the front pas- senger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function, the system must be able to de- tect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cush- ion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front- seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac- tivated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.

Seite 140

CONTROLS Safety

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

To enable correct recognition of the occu- pied seat cushion.

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically deter- mined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.

Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child re- straint system is to be installed on it.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passen- ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.

The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front pas- senger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systems The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particu- larly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi- cle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front- seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/ front-seat passenger airbags very much de- pends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control mes- sage is displayed.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way for- ward.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi- tion.

Seite 141

Safety CONTROLS

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disap- pears.

If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re- peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

General information Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on us- ing the system can also be found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 252.

Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

After a tire or wheel replacement, a re- set was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.

After the tire inflation pressure was ad- justed to a new value, a reset was per- formed.

Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status The system status can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys- tem is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Additional information The current tire inflation pressures are dis- played too. The values shown are instanta- neous measurements and may vary depend- ing on driving style or weather conditions.

Resetting the system Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".

6. Drive away.

The following is displayed: "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor".

After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving.

After a successfully completed reset, the fol- lowing is displayed: "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures.".

Seite 142

CONTROLS Safety

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes auto- matically.

Messages

General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss- ing tire inflation pressure impacts han- dling, such as steering and braking re- sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message ap- pears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla- tion pressures stored during the last reset.

Inflation was not carried out ac- cording to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.

2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a tire inflation pressure loss.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla- tion pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moder- ately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.

Seite 143

Safety CONTROLS

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas station, check and correct the tire infla- tion pressure in all four tires, if neces- sary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla- tion pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 261, are la- beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres- sure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealers service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- ity when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Safety

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driv- ing range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

Greater likelihood of swerving off course.

Longer braking distances.

Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci- dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstan- ces.

Failure performing a reset The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

Malfunction The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pres- sure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the fol- lowing situations:

A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, for instance an emergency wheel, is mounted: have it checked by a dealers

Seite 145

Safety CONTROLS

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop as needed.

Malfunction: have system checked by a dealers service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop.

The system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.

Interference caused by systems or devi- ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla- tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han- dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica- tor to indicate when the system is not oper- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi- cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a mal- function, the telltale will flash for approxi- mately one minute and then remain contin- uously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal- functions may occur for a variety of rea- sons, including the installation of replace- ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- tioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en- sure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

Concept The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differen- ces between the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual in- flation pressure in the tires.

Seite 146

CONTROLS Safety

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini- tialization was performed with the cor- rect tire inflation pressure.

After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was per- formed.

Status display The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization required An initialization must be performed in the following situations:

After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.

After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initialization When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".

6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driv- ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Messages

General information When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss- ing tire inflation pressure impacts han- dling, such as steering and braking re- sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

Seite 147

Safety CONTROLS

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 261, are la- beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres- sure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealers service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- ity when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driv- ing range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions,

Seite 148

CONTROLS Safety

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

Greater likelihood of swerving off course.

Longer braking distances.

Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci- dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recog- nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recog- nized in advance.

When the system has not been initial- ized.

When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.

Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift- ing).

When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

Concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help pre- vent an imminent collision.

Approach control warning with City light braking function, refer to page 150.

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation, refer to page 153.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judg- ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Seite 149

Safety CONTROLS

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto- matically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate accord- ing to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respec- tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Approach control warning with city light braking func- tion

Concept The system may prevent some accidents. In the event of an accident, the system may re- duce impact speed.

The system sounds a warning before an im- minent collision and activates brakes inde- pendently, if needed.

The Brake Assistant function activates and applies the brakes with limited force and duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

The approach control warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehi- cle intentionally, the approach control warn- ing and braking are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions.

General information The system warns at two levels of an immi- nent danger of collision at speeds from ap- prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn- ings may vary with the current driving situation.

Seite 150

CONTROLS Safety

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Braking is performed at speeds up to ap- proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judg- ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Seite 151

Safety CONTROLS

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after ev- ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respec- tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"

5. Select the desired setting.

The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarn- ing.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.

Brake and make an evasive ma- neuver, if necessary.

Prewarning This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted.

Acute warning with braking function An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to inter- vene. During a warning, the maximum brak- ing force is used. In order to activate the

Seite 152

CONTROLS Safety

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking in- tervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The driver may interrupt the braking inter- vention function by stepping on the acceler- ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- ing wheel.

The systems ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Detection range The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late.

The following situations may not be de- tected, for example:

Slow moving vehicles when you ap- proach them at high speed.

Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

Vehicles with an unusual rear appear- ance.

Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

In tight curves.

If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.

If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

If there are constant blinding effects be- cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, there may also be an excess of premature or unjustified warnings and reac- tions.

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation

Concept The system may prevent some accidents with pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the system will issue a warning if there is imminent

Seite 153

Safety CONTROLS

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup- port this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mir- ror controls the system.

General information In sufficiently bright conditions, the system issues a warning of a possible risk of colli- sion with pedestrians in the speed range from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h

The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas:

Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.

Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo- cated within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judg- ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Seite 154

CONTROLS Safety

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after ev- ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually

switched off according to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respec- tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to inter- vene. During a warning, the maximum brak- ing force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking in- tervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

Seite 155

Safety CONTROLS

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The driver may interrupt the braking inter- vention function by stepping on the acceler- ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- ing wheel.

The systems ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Detection range The detection potential of the camera is lim- ited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or be issued late.

The following situations may not be de- tected, for example:

Partially covered pedestrians.

Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.

Pedestrians outside of the detection range.

Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situa- tions:

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

In tight curves.

If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.

If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

If there are constant blinding effects be- cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

When it is dark outside.

Brake force display

Concept Additional brake lights indicate emergency braking to the traffic behind. This can re- duce the risk of a rear-end collision.

General information

During normal brake application, the brake lights light up.

Seite 156

CONTROLS Safety

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

During heavy brake application, the flashers additionally light up.

PostCrash iBrake

Concept In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in cer- tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

At standstill After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

Harder vehicle braking In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the braking pres- sure will be higher than the braking pres- sure that is achieved by the automatic brak- ing function. This interrupts automatic braking.

Interrupting automatic braking It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance for an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

By pressing the brake pedal.

By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Seite 157

Safety CONTROLS

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Antilock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, which increases the active safety.

ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys- tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak- ing capability to the furthest possible ex- tent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during an emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities pro- vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Concept Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

General information DSC detects the following unstable driving conditions, for instance:

Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer- ing.

Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 159, is a version of the DSC where for- ward momentum is optimized.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

When driving with a roof load, for in- stance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tip- ping in critical driving situations. There

Seite 158

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy- namic Stability Control when driving with roof load.

Indicator/warning lights The indicator light flashes: DSC con- trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General information When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, un- til the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up in the instrument cluster and dis- plays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light go out.

Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis- played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Automatic activation When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa- tion occurs in the following situations:

The vehicle has a flat tire.

When activating cruise control in the TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.

DTC Dynamic Traction Con- trol

Concept DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil- ity Control where forward momentum is op- timized.

The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions, for instance unp- lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is lim- ited during acceleration and when driving in curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circum- stances:

When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.

When driving off from deep snow or loose ground.

When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press the button.

Seite 159

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica- tor light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.

ALL4

ALL4 is the all-wheel-drive system of your vehicle. Concerted action by ALL4 and DSC Dynamic Stability Control further optimizes traction and driving dynamics. The ALL4 all-wheel-drive system variably distributes the driving forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface.

Adaptive chassis

Concept The tuning of the suspension can be changed with the system.

The system offers several different pro- grams.

The programs are selected via the MINI Driving Modes switch.

Programs

MID/GREEN Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for more comfort.

SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the shock ab- sorbers for greater driving agility.

MINI Driving Modes switch

Concept The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.

Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MID MID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is acti- vated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Concept GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi- mize range.

Seite 160

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Activating GREEN Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure GREEN"

5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Concept Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tuning of the chassis and suspension also changes and SPORT can be individually configured.

The configuration is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Activating SPORT Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up- ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

Configuring SPORT Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure SPORT"

5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is activated.

Configuring driving program Settings can be made for the following driv- ing programs in Driving mode:

GREEN, refer to page 160.

SPORT, refer to page 161.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of programs, which can be se- lected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster dis- plays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

Concept This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.

Seite 161

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving off with the drive-off assistant 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function.

The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for in- stance, and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac- cording to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Camera-based cruise control

Concept Using this system, a desired speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys- tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again shortly thereafter, the system is able to detect this within the given system lim- its.

General information A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the settings, the characteris- tics of cruise control many change in cer- tain ranges.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

The desired speed can be incorrectly ad- justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

Risk of accident due to too high speed dif- ferences to other vehicles, for instance in the following situations:

When fast approaching a slowly mov- ing vehicle.

Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.

Seite 163

Driving comfort CONTROLS

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

When fast approaching standing ve- hicles.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively inter- vene where appropriate.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 165.

Store/maintain speed, refer to page 165.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 165.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 166.

Reduce distance, refer to page 166.

Increase the distance, refer to page 166.

Button Function

Increase speed, refer to page 165.

Reduce speed, refer to page 165.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country speci- fications.

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Functional requirements

Speed range The system is best used on well-constructed roads.

The system is functional at speeds begin- ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: the system can also be acti- vated while the vehicle is stationary.

The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h.

Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control is interrupted below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to a stop.

Seite 164

CONTROLS Driving comfort

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and displayed with symbol.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: when switching off while stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta- neously.

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

Press the button on the steering wheel.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: when interrupting while sta- tionary, depress the brake pedal simultane- ously.

Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

When the driver applies the brakes.

Manual transmission: when the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.

If selector lever position N is set.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- venes.

If the detection range of the camera is impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy precipitation or glare effects from the sun.

Manual transmission: if the vehicle in front decelerates below a speed of ap- prox. 20 mph/30 km/h.

With the Stop&Go function for Step- tronic transmissions: following a sta- tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af- ter the vehicle was braked to a stop by the system.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the cur- rent speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The stored speed is displayed by the symbol in the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Seite 165

Driving comfort CONTROLS

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h.

or button: hold down to repeat the action.

Adjusting the distance

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment. Due to the system limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the in- strument cluster.

Increase the distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the in- strument cluster.

Continuing cruise control

General information An interrupted cruise control can be contin- ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur- rent speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Other- wise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

When the system is switched off.

When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed and distance

Press the button with the system in- terrupted. Cruise control is contin- ued with the stored values. The in-

strument cluster briefly displays the selected distance.

Seite 166

CONTROLS Driving comfort

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driv- ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ad- just the desired speed to the traffic condi- tions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control off Distance control can be switched off and on when driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Or:

Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, press one of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, a Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

In addition to the indicator light, the desired speed is displayed in the Info Dis- play.

Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.

Display lights up orange: system is in- terrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically af- ter the system is switched on.

Instrument clusters without enhanced fea- tures: selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the Info Display.

Detected vehicle

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Symbol lights up orange: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

With the Stop&Go function for Step- tronic transmissions:

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.

ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti- vate ACC as follows:

Seite 167

Driving comfort CONTROLS

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

By briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

By pressing the RES CNCL button.

By pressing the or button.

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Symbol flashes orange.

The conditions are not adequate for the sys- tem to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneu- ver, if necessary.

System interrupted without detected vehicle.

System interrupted with detected ve- hicle.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the fol- lowing situations:

For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-moving road users.

For red traffic lights.

For cross traffic.

For oncoming traffic.

Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork- ing lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not de- tected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

Seite 168

CONTROLS Driving comfort

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: driving off In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example:

On steep uphill grades.

In front of bumps in the road.

In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.

Cornering

When the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Be- cause curves may not be anticipated in ad- vance, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

The system has a limited detection range. Situations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system de- celerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator

pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions:

Poorer vehicle recognition.

Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.

Examples of unfavorable weather or light conditions:

Wet conditions.

Snowfall.

Slush.

Fog.

Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac- tively, for instance by braking, steering or evading.

Engine power The desired speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi- cient.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails or was automatically deacti- vated.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

When an object was not correctly de- tected.

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

In tight curves.

If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.

When driving toward bright lights.

Seite 169

Driving comfort CONTROLS

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Up to 20 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop button.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

Cruise control

Concept Using this system, a desired speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information The system is functional at speeds begin- ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the settings, the cruise con- trol settings many change under certain conditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

The use of the system can lead to an in- creased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance:

On winding roads.

In heavy traffic.

On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface.

There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 170.

Store speed, refer to page 171.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 170.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 171.

Increase speed, refer to page 171.

Reduce speed, refer to page 171.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Seite 170

CONTROLS Driving comfort

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

When the driver applies the brakes.

If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.

If the gear engaged is too high for the current speed.

If selector lever position N is set.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- venes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the cur- rent speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h.

or button: press button to resist- ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler- ates or decelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General information An interrupted cruise control can be contin- ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur- rent speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Other-

Seite 171

Driving comfort CONTROLS

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

wise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

Calling up the stored speed

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and main- tained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the indicator light in the instru- ment cluster indicates whether the system is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The desired speed is displayed to- gether with the symbol.

Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.

Display lights up orange: system is in- terrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

No display: system is switched off.

Instrument cluster without enhanced fea- tures:

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine power The desired speed is also maintained down- hill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

Concept PDC is a support when parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve- hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob- jects that you are approaching slowly are in- dicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General information The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers.

The delete range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the fol- lowing situations:

By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.

By the rear middle sensors at ap- prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-

Seite 172

CONTROLS Driving comfort

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

cle surroundings closely and actively in- tervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis- tance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bump- ers.

Functional requirements Ensure full functionality:

Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers, bicycle racks or similar.

Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

With front PDC: when obstacles are de- tected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than ap- prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on ob- stacle detection can be switched off. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver pro- file currently used.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

On: the LED lights up.

Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.

Seite 173

Driving comfort CONTROLS

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Depending on the equipment version, the system cannot be switched off manually if the reverse gear is engaged.

Warning

Signal tones An intermittent tone indicates when the ve- hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected to the left rear of the ve- hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals.

When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin- uous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: when objects are simulta- neously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig- nal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selec- tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

Volume The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed

on the Control Display before a signal sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

For small children and animals.

For persons with certain clothing, for in- stance coats.

With external interference of the ultra- sound, for instance from passing vehi- cles or loud machines.

When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- aged or out of position.

If cargo protrudes.

Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet condi-

Seite 174

CONTROLS Driving comfort

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

With moving objects.

With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

With objects with corners and sharp edges.

With objects with a fine surface struc- ture such as fences.

For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, for in- stance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a con- tinuous tone sounds.

False warnings The system may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

In heavy rain.

When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.

When sensors are covered in snow.

On rough road surfaces.

On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.

In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, for instance in under- ground garages.

In automatic vehicle washes.

Due to heavy exhaust.

Due to other ultrasound sources, for in- stance sweeping machines, high pres- sure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a contin- uous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the mal- function due to other ultrasound sources

is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on ob- stacle detection, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switching on/off.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi- cle surroundings closely and actively in- tervene where appropriate.

Seite 175

Driving comfort CONTROLS

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is switched on automatically if selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

On: the LED lights up.

Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.

Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID) If the rearview camera view is not dis- played, change the view via the Central In- formation Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirements The rearview camera is switched on.

The tailgate is fully closed.

Keep the recording range of the camera clear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems and trailers that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunc- tions.

Activating assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius lines are indi- cated.

Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Seite 176

CONTROLS Driving comfort

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Obstacles are marked, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneu- vering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steer- ing angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road.

Only one turning radius line is displayed af- ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer- tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta- cle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark- ings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control.

Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

Seite 177

Driving comfort CONTROLS

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the cor- responding turning radius line.

Display settings

Brightness With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set- ting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set- ting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob- jects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Control chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Dis- play may be closer than they appear. There-

fore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

General information Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps:

Switching on and activating.

Parking space search.

Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the Control Dis- play.

A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

Seite 178

CONTROLS Driving comfort

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis- tance Control applies in addition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring park- ing spaces are located on the wheel hous- ing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasound sensors Ensure full functionality:

Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers.

Keep the sensors clean and unob- structed.

For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward

approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

Maximum distance to row of parked ve- hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space Gaps behind an object that has a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m.

Gap between two objects with a mini- mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.

Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking Doors and tailgate are closed.

Seite 179

Driving comfort CONTROLS

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The parking brake is released.

When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn sig- nal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button

Press the park assistance button.

The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automati- cally.

Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not availa- ble.

White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and system status

Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park- ing assistant is activated and the park- ing space search is active.

Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.

The parking procedure is active. The system takes over the steering.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deacti- vated, the displays on the Control Dis- play are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant, refer to page 180. Ac- tivate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

Seite 180

CONTROLS Driving comfort

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are dis- played on the display, refer to page 180.

3. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the station- ary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is in- dicated on the display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

Press the park assistance button.

"Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

If the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.

If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display.

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.

Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces.

If a maximum number of parking at- tempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.

If the PDC Park Distance Control dis- plays clearances that are too small.

When switching into other functions of the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming An interrupted parking procedure can be continued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 180, and follow the instructions on the display.

Switching off The system can be switched off as follows:

Press the park assistance button.

Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis- tance in the following situations:

In tight curves.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.

On slippery ground.

Seite 181

Driving comfort CONTROLS

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.

With a mounted emergency wheel.

With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

For small children and animals.

For persons with certain clothing, for in- stance coats.

With external interference of the ultra- sound, for instance from passing vehi- cles or loud machines.

When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- aged or out of position.

If cargo protrudes.

Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet condi- tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

With moving objects.

With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

With objects with corners and sharp edges.

With objects with a fine surface struc- ture such as fences.

For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, for in- stance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a con- tinuous tone sounds.

The parking assistant may identify park- ing spaces that are not suitable for park- ing.

Tire size The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the sys- tem checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 182

CONTROLS Driving comfort

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

Emission tested passenger compart- ment.

Microfilter.

Air conditioning system to control the temperature, air flow and recirculated- air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Automatic climate control.

Parked-car ventilation.

Seite 183

Climate control CONTROLS

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings

2 Air flow

3 Temperature

4 Seat heating, right 76

5 Air conditioning

6 Recirculated-air mode

7 Rear window defroster

8 Windshield defroster

9 Seat heating, left 76

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn the wheel for air flow all the way to the left.

Temperature

Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on the set temperature.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de- sired temperature.

Seite 184

CONTROLS Climate control

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con- ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The air conditioner produces condensation water, refer to page 215, that will exit from below the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- tants in the immediate environment by tem- porarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recir- culated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte- rior.

To prevent window condensation, recircu- lated-air mode switches off automatically af- ter a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recircu- lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad- justed manually.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de- sired air flow.

The higher the air flow, the more effective the heating or cooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Controlling the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired intermediate setting.

Windows.

Upper body region.

Floor area.

Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

Seite 185

Climate control CONTROLS

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

To defrost windows and remove condensation Make the following settings to defrost the windows and remove condensation:

Direct the air distribution onto the win- dows.

Increasing the air flow.

Increase the temperature.

Switch on the air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

For permanent activation, press the button for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti- vated continuously at an external tempera- ture below approx. 41 /5 .

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat- ing output is reduced.

Microfilter In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter filters dust and pollen from the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 282.

Seite 186

CONTROLS Climate control

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left

2 Display

3 Air flow, AUTO intensity

4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual

6 Display

7 Temperature, right

8 Seat heating, right 76

9 Maximum cooling

10 Air conditioning

11 Recirculated-air mode

12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster

14 To defrost windows and remove conden- sation

15 Seat heating, left 76

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if

Seite 187

Climate control CONTROLS

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

necessary by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de- sired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to ad- just the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con- ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is switched on auto- matically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 215, de- velops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

General information

The function is available with external tem- peratures beyond approx. 32 /0 and with the engine running.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro- gram active.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically depending on the temperature in the car's interior and the de- sired temperature setting including the se- lected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side win- dows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Seite 188

CONTROLS Climate control

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Point the side vents toward the side win- dows.

The following features are switched on au- tomatically with the AUTO program:

The air conditioning, refer to page 188.

To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribu- tion.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the au- tomatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the de- sired intensity from soft to in- tensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the posi- tion of the illuminated LED segment.

Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode

Concept

The automatic recirculated-air control AUC recognizes odors or pollutants in the out- side air. The outside air supply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated.

General information

If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.

If the system is deactivated, outside air con- tinuously flows into the car's interior.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- tants in the immediate environment by tem- porarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Switching on/off

Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LEDs off: outside air flows in continu- ously.

Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automati- cally.

Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recircu- lated-air mode switches off automatically af- ter a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

If windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculating mode and press the AUTO but- ton. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.

Adjusting the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad- justed manually.

General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de- sired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate con- trol may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Seite 189

Climate control CONTROLS

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Press the button repeatedly to se- lect a program:

Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

Upper body region and floor area.

Floor area.

Windows and floor area.

Windows.

Windows and upper body region.

Upper body region.

To defrost windows and remove condensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win- dows.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro- gram active.

If there is window condensation, switch on the air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster switches off au- tomatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

For permanent activation, press the button for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti- vated continuously at an external tempera- ture below approx. 41 /5 .

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat- ing output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 282.

Ventilation

Setting The air flow directions can be individually adjusted:

Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools no- ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem- perature.

Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's inte- rior.

Seite 190

CONTROLS Climate control

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Front ventilation

Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.

Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrows.

Ventilation in the rear

Lever for changing the air flow direc- tion, arrow 1.

Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing of the vents, arrow 2.

Parked-car ventilation

Concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.

General information The parked-car ventilation can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset

activation times. The system remains switched on for 30 minutes.

The parked-car ventilation system is oper- ated via the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-

ready state.

Direct operation or preset activation time: does not depend on external tem- perature.

Battery is sufficiently charged.

If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the vehicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the activation time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Comfort ventilation"

Seite 191

Climate control CONTROLS

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

5. Select the desired activation time.

6. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "For start time at:"

Activate the desired activation time.

The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the activation time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on.

The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reactivated.

Seite 192

CONTROLS Climate control

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Integrated Universal Remote Control

Concept The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func- tions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys- tems.

General information The Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans- mitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro- grammed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular sys- tem is required in order to program the re- mote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys- tems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may re- sult in injury, for example, body parts be- coming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the pack- aging or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system

is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen- tex Corporation.

Seite 193

Interior equipment CONTROLS

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of pro- gramming to ensure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control.

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro- gramming of the buttons on the interior mirror.

3. Press the interior mirror button to be programmed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and re- peatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED lights up green: program- ming completed.

Release the button.

The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir- ror for 2 seconds and release. Per- form this procedure three times to complete the programming proce- dure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, con- tinue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not com- pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other but- tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system af- ter repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a roll- ing code radio system.

Refer to the owner's manual for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio sys- tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con- trol and the system also have to be synchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.

Seite 194

CONTROLS Interior equipment

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re- mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the inte- rior mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing but- ton on the system being programmed, e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If neces- sary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the pro- grammed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press and hold the interior mirror but- ton to be programmed.

3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir- ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec- onds, release the button.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and re- peatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED can light up in different ways.

The LED lights up green: the pro- gramming procedure is completed.

Release the button.

The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but pro- gramming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir- ror for 2 seconds and release. Per- form this procedure three times to complete the programming proce- dure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, con- tinue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not com- pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not com- pleted, the previous programming will re- main unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys- tems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may re- sult in injury, for example, body parts be- coming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire- less signal is being transmitted.

Seite 195

Interior equipment CONTROLS

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Deleting stored functions All stored functions will be deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi- mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in- terior mirror flashes green rapidly.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror display The compass shows the current driving di- rection.

Operating concept Various functions can be called up by press- ing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed:

Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.

12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the ve- hicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 196

CONTROLS Interior equipment

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location ap- pears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approx- imately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

The wrong compass point is displayed.

The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direc- tion of travel.

Not all points of the compass are dis- played.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal-

lic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.

3. Press and hold the control button for ap- prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc- cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language Press and hold the control button for ap- prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

Seite 197

Interior equipment CONTROLS

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after ap- proximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shield To provide protection against glare, fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror light- ing switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ig- nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil- dren do not use the cigarette lighter.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Sockets

Concept The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the ignition is switched on or the engine is running.

General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Seite 198

CONTROLS Interior equipment

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Do not damage the socket by using non- compatible connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's in- terior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.

USB port

General information Follow the information regarding the con- nection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections, refer to page 48.

Seite 199

Interior equipment CONTROLS

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

In the front center console

The USB port is located in the front of the center console.

Properties:

USB port Type A.

For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.

Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

In the rear center console

One USB dual charge socket is located in the rear center console.

Properties:

USB port Type C.

For charging of mobile devices.

Charge current: max. 3 A.

Under the center armrest

The USB port is located under the center armrest.

Properties:

USB port Type C.

For charging of mobile devices.

Charge current: max. 3 A.

Seite 200

CONTROLS Interior equipment

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- terior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:

Glove compartment on the front passen- ger side.

Compartments in the doors.

Storage compartment in the center arm- rest.

Storage compartment in front of the cup holders.

Clothes hooks

Storage compartments in the cargo area.

Storage tray in the center console.

Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment pro- trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or eva- sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment im- mediately after using it.

Seite 201

Storage compartments CONTROLS

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing Fold up the cover.

Compartments in the doors

General information There are storage compartments in the doors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an acci- dent or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any break- able objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage com- partments.

Center armrest

General information The center armrest contains a storage com- partment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm- rest upward, arrow 2.

Set the incline The center armrest can be adjusted in sev- eral tilt settings.

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the cars interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an acci- dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable

Seite 202

CONTROLS Storage compartments

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

containers. Do not transport hot bever- ages.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

General information The cup holder is located in the center arm- rest.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

To open: press the button.

To close: push both covers back in, one after the other.

Safety information

NOTICE

With an open cup holder, the center arm- rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property. Press back the covers before the center armrest is folded up.

Clothes hooks

General information The clothes hooks are located above the rear doors.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending cloth- ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

Warning

Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop- erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in- stance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

Seite 203

Storage compartments CONTROLS

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Loading

Safety information

Warning

High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sud- den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively im- pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen- ing the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- terior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for in- stance in the event of an accident or dur- ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi- cle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicles placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca- pacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi- cle, the amount of available cargo and

Seite 204

CONTROLS Cargo area

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug- gage and cargo being loaded on the ve- hicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load ca- pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the availa- ble cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos- sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.

Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

If necessary, fold down the rear back- rests to stow large cargo.

Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

With storage compartment package: to se- cure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Cargo cover

General information When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- terior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Seite 205

Cargo area CONTROLS

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Removing For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.

Installing 1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-

tally into the two side brackets until it audibly engages.

2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

Storage compartments in the cargo area

Storage compartment on the side A storage compartment is located on the left side.

Multi-function hook

Warning

Improper use of the multi-function hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, such as shopping

bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.

The cargo area contains two multi-function hooks.

Enlarging the cargo area

Concept Depending on the vehicle equipment, the cargo area can be enlarged as follows:

The rear seat backrests can be folded down.

The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position using the cargo setting.

General information The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 402040. The side rear seat backrests and the center section can be folded down separately.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear.

Seite 206

CONTROLS Cargo area

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse- cured cargo can be thrown about the cars interior; for instance, in the event of an ac- cident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after fold- ing it back.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur due to unintentional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by the straps. There is a risk of injury. Only use straps for releasing the rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects on the straps.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked.

If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear

Pull the strap. The rear seat backrest folds forward.

Cargo position

Concept The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position individually. An adjustment in several tilt stages is possible as needed.

Seite 207

Cargo area CONTROLS

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjusting 1. Pull the strap.

2. Set the loading position of the rear seat backrest as required.

3. Engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrest Without a cargo position:

1. Pull the strap.

2. Return the rear seat backrest to the up- right seating position and engage it.

With a cargo position:

1. Pull the strap.

2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward. The rear seat backrest first engages in the loading position.

3. Pull the strap again.

4. Return the rear seat backrest to the up- right seating position and engage it.

Variable cargo area floor

Concept With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport requirements.

General information Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 204.

Seite 208

CONTROLS Cargo area

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Removing the cargo floor panel 1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer

to page 206.

2. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel upward.

3. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold up above the locking point of the upper position, refer to page 209.

4. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from the brackets.

Inserting the cargo floor panel 1. Push the cargo area floor into the sup-

ports at a shallow angle. The cargo area floor must engage noticeably.

2. Fold the cargo area floor over down- ward.

Folded up position

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneu- vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property.

Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to separate the cargo area and car's interior in the sense of a parti- tion net.

Only use the variable cargo floor panel in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked.

Fold down the variable cargo floor panel before driving off.

Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for instance.

Fold up the cargo floor panel Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel upward.

Fold up the cargo floor panel. You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Seite 209

Cargo area CONTROLS

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

MINI Picnic Bench

Concept The MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfort- able seating surface on the loading lip of the vehicle.

General information Only use the MINI Picnic Bench while the vehicle is parked and with the tailgate open. When the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use, fold it together to prevent soiling and dam- age.

In vehicles with a no-touch opening and closing tailgate:

If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the tailgate can be opened or closed inadver- tently by an unconscious or alleged recog- nized foot movement.

The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

Overview The MINI Picnic Bench is located on the un- derside of the cargo area floor.

Mounting 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor

panel upward.

2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on the front part of the cargo floor panel and at- tach it to the rear part of the cargo floor panel using the four snaps.

3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench to- ward the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench is fastened with magnets.

4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor downward.

To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, pro- ceed in reverse order.

Seite 210

CONTROLS Cargo area

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Folding down 1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.

2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the mid- dle and pull it back and up against the force of the magnets.

3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor downward and place the MINI Picnic Bench over the loading lip of the cargo area. Place a protective cloth over the bumper.

Folding up Fold rear part of the cargo floor panel up- ward.

The MINI Picnic Bench swings against the underside of the cargo area floor and is fas- tened there with magnets.

Seite 211

Cargo area CONTROLS

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Breaking-in period

General information Moving parts need to begin working to- gether smoothly.

The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good effi- ciency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, refer to page 115.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and inter- vene early if necessary. Observe the break- in procedures of the respective parts and components.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:

For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir- cumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- turing circumstances when tires are brand- new; they achieve their full traction poten- tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after ap- prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its opti- mal level only after a distance driven of ap- prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break- in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be ob- served if any of the components mentioned

Seite 212

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

Warning

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi- cle and can endanger occupants and other traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or eva- sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.

Driving with the tailgate open If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:

Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.

Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust gas system

Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the ex- haust gas system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system, includ- ing the exhaust pipe.

Warning

If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and inju- ries. Do not remove the heat shields instal- led and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during park- ing.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mo- bile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior an- tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer- ence and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road sur- face.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- planing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermin- ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi- cle.

Seite 213

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Driving through water

General information When driving through water, follow the fol- lowing:

Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.

Drive through calm water only.

Drive through water only if it is not deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

Drive through water no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through too deep water, water can enter into the en- gine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated wa- ter level and the maximum speed for driv- ing through water.

Braking safely

General information The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situations that require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- jects in the vehicle such that they are se- cured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re- moved, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.

The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be avail- able when you need it.

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re- duce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Seite 214

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces- sive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state or with the engine switched off, safety functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking assistance and steering assistance, may not be available. There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or with the engine switched off.

Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contami- nation on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances:

Low mileage.

Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.

Infrequent use of the brakes.

Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., curbs or underground garage entrances, contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, and the underbody may occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance availa- ble.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General information Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accesso- ries.

Mounting Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Loading Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

Be sure that adequate clearance is main- tained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Distribute the roof load uniformly.

The roof load should not extend past the loading area.

Seite 215

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.

Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in- stance using ratchet straps.

Do not let objects project into the open- ing path of the tailgate.

Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac- celeration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Driving on poor roads

Concept Because of its greater ground clearance, the vehicle can be driven on a variety of road types and qualities.

All-wheel drive can help improve forward momentum.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones or branches, can damage the vehi- cle. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on unpaved terrain.

When driving on poor roads For your own safety, for the safety of pas- sengers and of the vehicle, heed the follow- ing points:

Familiarize yourself with the vehicle be- fore driving.

Do not take risks when driving.

Adjust the speed to the road surface conditions. The steeper and more un- even the road surface, the slower the speed.

When driving on steep uphill or down- hill grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near the MAX mark.

Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in contact with the ground. The ground clearance may vary depending on the vehicle load.

When wheels continue to spin, depress the accelerator so that driving stability control systems can distribute the driv- ing force to the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Control if available.

After a trip on poor roads Note the following to maintain driving safety:

Clear heavy soiling from the body.

Keep the wheels and tires free of mud, snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam- age.

Driving on racetracks

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty.

Seite 216

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Reducing fuel consumption

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emis- sion values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.

The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and environ- mental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consump- tion.

Remove attached parts follow- ing use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear luggage racks which are no longer re- quired following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel con- sumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

Tires

General information Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla- tion pressure at least twice a month and be- fore starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Seite 217

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak- ing.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indicator, refer to page 124.

Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the ac- celerator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coast- ing.

Switch off the engine during longer stops

Switching off the engine Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross- ings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle automatically switches off the engine dur- ing a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then re- started rather than leaving the engine run- ning constantly, fuel consumption and emis- sions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also deter- mined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or envi- ronmental factors.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are not needed.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv- ice life. MINI recommends that mainte- nance work be performed by a MINI service center.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 282.

GREEN Mode

Concept GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, for in- stance the climate control output, are ad- justed.

For Steptronic transmission:

Seite 218

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Under certain conditions the engine is auto- matically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. The D selector lever position remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style.

The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.

General information The system includes the following functions and displays:

GREEN Limit, refer to page 219

GREEN climate control, refer to page 219.

GREEN bonus range, refer to page 220.

GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to page 220.

Coasting driving condition, refer to page 221.

Activating GREEN Mode Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the in- strument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activating GREEN Mode.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display (CID) 1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure GREEN"

5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions The following functions can be activated/ deactivated:

"GREEN speed warning"

"GREEN climate control"

"Coasting"

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

GREEN Limit "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit

is activated.

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

"Tip at:"

Set the desired speed for the GREEN Limit.

GREEN climate control Climate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tem- perature and adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and ex- terior mirror is reduced.

Coasting Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and coasting, refer to page 221, with the engine idling.

Seite 219

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

This function is only available in GREEN Mode.

Deactivate the function to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling down- hill.

GREEN potential savings Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus range

A modified driving style helps you extend your driving range.

The range extension can be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range dis- play.

The bonus range is automatically reset ev- ery time the vehicle is refueled.

Green display: efficient driving style.

Gray display: modify driving style, for instance by backing off the accelerator pedal.

Efficiency display

A bar display in the instru- ment cluster indicates your current driving efficiency.

Mark in the left area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered

by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when accelerating.

The efficiency of your driving style is shown by the position of the mark:

Mark inside the green range: efficient driving style.

Mark outside the green range: modify driving style, for example by backing off the accelerator.

GREEN tip, driving instruction

General information

The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by backing off the accelerator.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

Activating/deactivating the display Activate information relating to the driving style and GREEN tips in the instrument cluster using the Central Information Dis- play (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "GREEN info"

GREEN tip, symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.

Seite 220

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style, look well ahead when driving, accelerate conservatively, and delay accelerating.

Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.

Steptronic transmission:

Switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions.

Manual transmission:

Follow the shift instructions.

Manual transmission:

Engage neutral for an engine stop.

Coasting

Concept The function helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the en- gine is automatically decoupled from the transmission when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

As soon as you step on the brake or acceler- ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou- pled again.

General information Coasting is a component of the GREEN driv- ing mode.

Coasting is automatically activated when the GREEN driving mode is called via the MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to page 160.

A proactive driving style helps the driver to use the function often and supports the effi- cient effect of coasting.

Functional requirements The function is available in the speed range from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to 100 mph/160 km/h.

Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.

The selector lever is in selector lever po- sition D.

Engine and transmission are at operat- ing temperature.

With a camera in the area of the interior mirror: the system does not detect any vehicles ahead of you.

Operation via shift paddles

Concept

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles.

Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles

1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right shift paddle.

2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right shift paddle again.

To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.

Seite 221

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Display

Instrument cluster without enhanced features

The bar display below the tachometer is fil- led in green and the mark appears at the zero point. The tachometer indicates idle speed.

System limits The function is not available if one of the following conditions applies:

DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.

Cruise control is activated.

If driving in the dynamic limit range.

If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.

The battery charge state is temporarily too low.

The vehicle electrical system is drawing excessive current.

Seite 222

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Seite 223

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General information

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Control elements

1 Waveband/satellite radio

2 Change entertainment sources

3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Changing the station/track

5 Programmable memory buttons

Sound output

Safety information

Warning

A high sound output volume can damage your hearing. There is a risk of injury. Do not adjust the volume too high.

Volume and sound output Turn the button to adjust the vol-

ume.

Press the button to switch off the sound output. Pressing the but- ton again restores the previous volume setting.

Audio recording playback is stopped during muting.

Entertainment sources

General information Possible entertainment sources:

Radio, refer to page 228.

USB audio, refer to page 236.

Bluetooth audio, refer to page 236.

Changing the entertainment source On the radio:

1. Press the button.

A list of all currently available entertain- ment sources is displayed.

Seite 224

ENTERTAINMENT General information

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

2. Press the button again to select an entertainment source.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Media/Radio"

A list of all possible entertainment sour- ces is displayed.

2. Select the desired entertainment source.

Via the button on the Controller:

1. Press the button.

The most recently selected entertain- ment source is played.

2. Press the button again.

A list of all currently available entertain- ment sources is displayed.

3. Select the desired entertainment source.

Seite 225

General information ENTERTAINMENT

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tone

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Treble, bass, balance, and fader

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired setting:

"Treble": treble adjustment.

"Bass": depth adjustment.

"Balance": left/right volume distribu- tion.

"Fader": front/rear volume distribu- tion.

4. To adjust: turn the Controller.

5. To store: press the Controller.

Volume equalization

Concept An automatic increase of the volume can be set to compensate for the increasing driving noises at higher speeds.

Set automatic volume increase 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired setting:

"Speed volume": ratio of entertain- ment volume to speed.

"PDC": ratio of the volume of the PDC signal tone to the entertainment vol- ume.

The basic setting ensures that the signal tone is audible at any volume.

"Gong": ratio of the volume of the signal tone, for instance for safety belt reminder, to the entertainment volume.

The basic setting ensures that the signal tone is audible at any volume.

"Microphone": sensitivity of the mi- crophone during a phone call.

The setting is adjusted while calling and is stored for the mobile phone used.

"Speakers": volume of the loudspeak- ers during a phone call.

Audio recording playback is stopped during muting.

The setting is adjusted while calling and is stored for the mobile phone used.

Seite 226

ENTERTAINMENT Tone

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Reset the tone settings

The tone settings are reset to the factory settings.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Tone"

3. "Reset"

Seite 227

Tone ENTERTAINMENT

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Radio

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

AM/FM station

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it may not be possible to receive AM stations.

Radio Data System RDS

Concept RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave- band.

It is recommended to switch on RDS.

Switching on/off 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Press the button.

4. "RDS"

Selecting a station 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

The last station listened to will be played and the station list displayed.

3. Select the desired station.

Changing the station On the radio:

Press the left or right button.

The previous or next station from the list of stations is played.

Storing a station

General information A symbol on the highlighted channel indi- cates whether the channel has already been stored.

Symbol Meaning

Station is not stored.

Station is already stored.

Storing the station being played 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Save station"

The storage list is displayed.

5. Select the desired memory location.

Seite 228

ENTERTAINMENT Radio

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Storing a station that is not being played 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Highlight the desired station.

4. Press the Controller and hold until the storage list is displayed.

5. Select the desired memory location.

The stations can also be stored on the pro- grammable memory buttons, refer to page 41.

Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Manual search"

5. To select the frequency: turn the Con- troller.

6. To store the frequency: press the Con- troller.

Renaming a station When storing a station with RDS signal, the RDS information transferred during storing is accepted as the station name. The station name can be changed.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press the button.

5. "Rename to:"

If necessary, wait until the name of the desired station appears.

6. Press the Controller to store this name.

Additional station information

Concept If a radio station broadcasts radio text or radio text plus, this information can be dis- played, for instance the track or performer of the music. Availability, content and se- quence are set by the radio station.

Displaying additional station information 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press the button.

5. "Station info"

HD Radio reception

Concept Many radio stations broadcast both analog and digital signals.

General information When setting a station with a digital signal, it may take a few seconds before the station plays in digital quality.

Information about HD Radio stations whose station name ends with ...HD or with ...HD1:

In areas in which the station is not continu- ously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital recep- tion. In this case, switch off digital radio re- ception.

Information about HD Radio multicast sta- tions whose station name ends with ...HD2, ...HD3, ...:

In areas in which the station is not continu- ously received in digital mode, there may be interruptions of the audible signal lasting

Seite 229

Radio ENTERTAINMENT

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

several seconds. The duration of the inter- ruption depends on the reception.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Press the button.

4. "HD Radio reception"

This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional informa- tion on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select a station.

4. Press the button.

5. "Station info"

License conditions HD Radio Technology manu- factured under license from

iBiquity Digital Corporation. U. S. and For- eign Patents. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Satellite radio

General information Before a channel can be played, you must subscribe to it via telephone. Several chan- nels can be combined into specified pack- ages.

Managing a subscription

General information In order to enable or unsubscribe from channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unob- structed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Enabling channels 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Show subscription info"

The phone number and identification number of the radio are displayed.

5. Call the phone number to have the chan- nel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Show subscription info"

The phone number and identification number of the radio are displayed.

5. Call the phone number to cancel your subscription to the channel.

Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

The last channel played will be played back and the channel list displayed.

Seite 230

ENTERTAINMENT Radio

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. Select the desired channel from the channel list.

To display information about the selected channel:

1. Highlight a channel.

2. Press the button.

3. "Channel information"

Adjusting display of the channel list The display of the playback list can be ad- justed.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Change view"

5. Select the desired display:

"Channel"

The name of the channel will be dis- played.

"Artist"

The name of the artist playing will be displayed.

"Titles"

The name of the track playing will be displayed.

Changing the channel Press the button on the radio.

The next and/or previous channel from the channel list is played.

Storing a channel 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

A symbol on the highlighted channel indi- cates whether the channel has already been stored.

Symbol Meaning

Channel is not stored.

Channel is already stored.

To store the channel played:

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Save station"

The storage list is displayed.

3. Select the desired memory location.

Or:

1. Highlight the played channel.

2. Press the Controller.

The storage list is displayed.

3. Select the desired memory location.

To store a channel other than the one played:

1. Highlight the desired channel.

2. Press the Controller and hold until the storage list is displayed.

3. Select the desired memory location.

Or:

1. Highlight the desired channel.

2. Press the button.

3. "Save in presets"

The storage list is displayed.

4. Select the desired memory location.

The stations can also be stored on the pro- grammable memory buttons.

Selecting a category 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

Seite 231

Radio ENTERTAINMENT

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Category"

5. Select the desired category.

The subscribed channels from this cate- gory are displayed.

6. Select the desired channel.

Timeshift

General information The channel you are currently listening to is stored in a buffer for up to an hour.

Prerequisite: the signal must be available.

The stored audio track can be played with a delay following the live broadcast. When the memory is full, the older tracks are over- written. The memory is cleared when a new channel is selected or when the vehicle is switched off.

Opening the timeshift function 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Time shift"

Time shift forward/reverse Within the stored recording, it is possible to jump to any point in time.

Press the button on the radio or turn the Controller.

You can jump to the next or the previous track.

Press and hold the button on the radio.

The recording is spooled forward or back.

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast.

Automatic timeshift deacti- vated/activated.

/ Playback/pause.

Automatic timeshift With automatic timeshift, audio playback is paused for the following events.

Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.

Activation of the voice activation sys- tem.

Muting.

After that, audio playback is continued from the time of the interruption.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. To activate:

"Automatic time shift"

Deactivate:

"Automatic time shift".

Smart Favorites

General information A maximum of 6 channels can be stored as Smart Favorites.

If a stored channel is selected, the current track will be played from the beginning.

Adding the current channel to Smart Favorites

1. Press the button.

2. "Add to Smart Favorites"

Seite 232

ENTERTAINMENT Radio

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Removing the current channel from Smart Favorites

1. Press the button.

2. "Remove from Smart Favorites"

Selecting Smart Favorite 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Category"

5. Select a Smart Favorite.

The subscribed channels from this cate- gory are displayed.

6. Select the desired channel.

Favorites

General information A performer, a track, a league or a team can be stored as a favorite. If the stored favorite is played on a channel, a message appears on the Control Display. Up to 30 Favorites can be stored.

Storing the artist or track It is only possible to store Favorites that are currently being broadcast. The channel in- formation must be available.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Add to favorites"

5. Highlight the performer or track, and press the Controller.

A symbol indicates whether the artist and track were already stored.

Symbol Meaning

Artist/track is not stored.

Artist/track was already stored.

Storing the league or team 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Add to favorites"

5. "Add sports information"

6. Select the type of sport desired.

7. Select the desired team.

Activating/deactivating a notification A notification can be displayed when a se- lected favorite is being played.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Manage favorites"

The stored Favorites are displayed.

5. "Activate alert"

Set a check mark to activate notification for the selected Favorites.

Remove the check mark to deactivate notification for the selected Favorites.

6. Select the desired Favorites.

Opening the Favorites If an activated favorite is played back, the following message is displayed for approx. 20 seconds: "Favorite on air!".

To change to the played Favorites:

Tap on the message on the Control Display.

Or:

1. Move the Controller to the left.

Seite 233

Radio ENTERTAINMENT

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

2. "Favorite alert"

Select the symbol while the message is shown.

The displayed favorite is played.

When the message disappears, the list of channels that is currently playing one of the stored Favorites can be displayed.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Category"

3. Select the Favorites list.

The channels that are currently playing a favorite are displayed.

4. Select the channel that you would like to change to.

Deleting Favorites 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Manage favorites"

The stored Favorites are displayed.

5. Highlight the desired favorites.

6. Press the button.

7. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump

General information Traffic and weather information for a se- lected region is broadcast every few mi- nutes.

Selecting a region 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Configure jump"

5. Select the desired region.

Activating/deactivating Traffic Jump You must have reception in order to acti- vate or deactivate.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Configure jump"

5. "Jump to:"

Place a check mark to activate Traffic Jump.

Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available.

Remove the check mark to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Channel magazine In the channel magazine, the current and subsequent program for each channel booked is displayed.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "SiriusXM program guide"

Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an up- date of the channel names and positions. The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

System limits Reception may not be available in some

situations, such as under certain envi- ronmental or topographical conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this.

Seite 234

ENTERTAINMENT Radio

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Graphical contents can be received un- der certain circumstances.

The signal may not be available in tun- nels or underground garages next to tall buildings or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interfer- ence.

Stored stations

General information Up to 40 stations can be stored.

Selecting a station 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

Deleting a station 1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Highlight the station you want to delete.

4. Press the button.

5. "Delete entry"

Seite 235

Radio ENTERTAINMENT

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Audio

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Music tracks, audio books, and podcasts can be played back. Sound is played back through the vehicle loudspeakers.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following audio sources can be used:

Symbol Meaning

USB storage device.

Bluetooth audio.

USB storage device

Playable formats Popular audio formats such as MP3, AAC or WMA can be played.

Apple iPod/iPhone The music search and playback of Apple iPod/iPhone are supported.

Audio player and storage media with USB port Information on all music tracks, for instance artist, genre or track, as well as playback lists, are transmitted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB storage device, file size, and number of tracks.

During the transfer, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

The information for approx. 10,000 tracks can be stored in the vehicle.

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management DRM cannot be played.

Selecting the USB storage device Information on the USB port, refer to page 199.

1. Connecting USB storage devices to the USB port.

The adapter cable supplied with the USB storage device would be ideal.

2. "Media/Radio"

3. "USB"

Or:

Select the name of the USB storage de- vice.

Further playback descriptions, refer to page 237.

Bluetooth audio

General information Playback of music files on external devi-

ces such as audio devices or mobile phones via Bluetooth.

Seite 236

ENTERTAINMENT Audio

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The volume of the sound output depends on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device.

Up to four external devices can be con- nected to the vehicle.

Functional requirements Bluetooth device is connected to the ve-

hicle.

Bluetooth audio playback was activated.

Selecting the Bluetooth device 1. "Media/Radio"

2. Select the desired Bluetooth device from the list.

Further playback descriptions, refer to page 237.

If the Bluetooth device is not listed in the device list, Bluetooth audio playback may have not been activated. To activate Blue- tooth audio playback, proceed as follows:

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Manage mobile devices"

3. Select the desired Bluetooth device.

4. "Bluetooth audio"

Playback

General information Once an audio source has been selected, in- formation on playback appears on the Con- trol Display.

Information available for the current track followed by the playback list is shown on the Control Display. Content and scope of the playback list depend on the type of the selected playback source and the search cri- teria applied.

For USB and Bluetooth devices, the selected playback list is displayed. This can be the result of a search or of a previously stored playback list.

Further functions are displayed by moving the Controller to the left. The scope of these functions depends on the selected audio source.

Depending on the supported Bluetooth ver- sion, some Bluetooth device functions may not be available when using the Central In- formation Display (CID). If necessary, the missing functions can be accessed directly on the device itself.

Selecting a track Select the desired track from the playlist.

Starting with the selected track, all tracks of the playback list are played.

Changing the track On the radio:

Press the left or right button.

The previous or next track from the playlist is played.

Fast forward/reverse On the radio:

Press and hold the left or right but- ton.

Search criteria

General information The possible search criteria depend on the selected audio source.

Seite 237

Audio ENTERTAINMENT

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Searching for track information The following search criteria refer to the data stored in the track information.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. Select the desired setting:

"Search"

All the tracks containing the search string are displayed. Entering more characters will continue to narrow down the search results.

Tilt the Controller to the right to dis- play the list of results.

"Genres"

A list of all available genres is dis- played.

Select a genre to display all respec- tive artists.

"Artists"

A list of all available artists is dis- played.

Select an artist to display all respec- tive albums and tracks.

"Albums"

A list of all available albums is dis- played.

Select an album to display all respec- tive tracks.

"Titles"

A list of all available tracks is dis- played.

4. Select album, if needed.

5. Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

The search for artists and titles can also be selected directly.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Artists" or "Titles"

Tracks where the selected search criterion is not stored are summarized under "un- known". Tracks without track information can only be found via the directory struc- ture.

Search playlists 1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. "Playlists"

A list of all available playback lists is displayed.

4. Select the playback list.

5. Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the Control Display. A playback list is cre- ated from the search results.

Search audio books and podcasts Depending on the USB storage device and equipment, separate audio book and podcast searches are possible.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. Select the desired setting:

"Podcasts"

A list of all available podcasts is dis- played.

"Audio books"

A list of all available audio books is displayed.

4. Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the Control Display. A playback list is cre- ated from the search results.

Seite 238

ENTERTAINMENT Audio

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Search directory structure It is possible to search the USB storage de- vices via the directory structure.

The names of folders and tracks correspond to folder and file names. The folder and file names can deviate from the names in the track information.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. "Browse folder"

4. Change into a sub folder, if needed.

Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the Control Display. A playback list is cre- ated from the search results.

Random playback

Concept The current playlist or all tracks of the se- lected audio source are played back in ran- dom order.

Select random 1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Shuffle"

Seite 239

Audio ENTERTAINMENT

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Telephone

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Telephone functions

General information Mobile phones can be connected to the ve- hicle via Bluetooth. Pair and connect the mobile phone with the vehicle, refer to page 46.

At high temperatures, the charge function of the mobile phone can be limited where appropriate and functions are no longer exe- cuted.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is con- nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

When the mobile phone is used via the ve- hicle, refer to the owner's manual of the mo- bile phone.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Incoming call If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the net- work, the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise, only the phone number is dis- played.

Accepting a call Incoming calls can be answered in several ways.

Via Central Information Display (CID):

"Accept"

/

Press the corresponding button on the steering wheel.

Rejecting a call "Reject"

Ending a call Via Central Information Display (CID):

"End call"

/

Press the corresponding button on the steering wheel.

Last calls The last outgoing, missed, and incoming calls are transferred to the vehicle.

Seite 240

COMMUNICATION Telephone

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Displays 1. "Communication"

2. "Recent calls"

3. The 20 last calls are displayed.

Filtering call list 1. "Calls:"

2. Select the desired setting.

Selecting number from list Select from list. Call is established via the mobile phone.

To cancel: "End call"

Active calls

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button on the radio during the call, until the desired volume is reached. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic volume equalization 1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "Microphone" or "Speakers"

6. To adjust: turn the Controller.

7. To store: press the Controller.

Dialing a number 1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Enter the numbers.

4. Select the symbol.

Holding, resuming An active call can be put on hold and re- sumed later on.

"Hold/Resume"

Call is put on hold.

"Hold/Resume"

Call is resumed.

Muting the microphone When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.

"Microphone"

The muted microphone is automatically ac- tivated:

When a new connection is established.

When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining access to network services or for control- ling devices, for instance to make a remote inquiry of an answering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Keypad dialing"

2. Enter DTMF code.

Calls with multiple parties

General information You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal sounds where ap- propriate.

"Accept"

Seite 241

Telephone COMMUNICATION

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call An additional call can be established while a call is active.

1. "Contacts"

2. Select new number.

The call is started and the first call is put on hold.

Switching between two calls, hold call You can switch between two calls.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Resume"

The call on hold is resumed.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele- phone conference call. The calls must be made from the same mobile phone.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

Hands-free system

General information Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that were begun outside of the Blue- tooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with standby state or the ignition switched on. The vehicle key must be located in the vehicle for this to work.

Depending on the mobile phone, the system automatically switches to the hands-free system.

If the system does not switch over automat- ically, follow the instructions on the display of the mobile phone. Refer also to the own- er's manual of the mobile phone.

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands-free sys- tem can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone.

Follow the instructions on the display of the mobile phone. Refer also to the owner's manual of the mobile phone.

Contacts

General information Contacts from the mobile phone are trans- ferred and displayed. Contact pictures can be displayed, if the mobile phone supports this function.

Displaying all contacts 1. "Communication"

2. "Contacts"

The contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of con- tacts, contact search and quick search are offered.

Contact search Contact search is available with more than 30 contacts.

1. "Search"

2. Enter the letters.

The hits are displayed on the right side.

Seite 242

COMMUNICATION Telephone

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. Move the Controller to the right.

4. Select the contact to display it.

Quick search in lists Quick search is available starting from 30 contacts. All letters, for which there are entries, are displayed in alphabetical order on the left of the Control Display.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

All letters, for which contacts are stored, are displayed on the left.

2. Select the first letter of the desired con- tact.

The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Sorting contacts Contact names can be displayed in a differ- ent order. Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sort- ing order of the contacts may differ from the selected sorting order.

1. Press the button.

2. "Sort contacts"

3. "Last name" or "First name"

Voice command response A connected smartphone can be used via voice operation.

Activate voice command response on the smartphone for this purpose.

Button on the steering wheel

Function

Press the button for at least 3 seconds. Voice command response is acti- vated on the smartphone.

The symbol indicates that the voice command response is active.

Seite 243

Telephone COMMUNICATION

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

MINI Connected

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Teleservices

Concept Teleservices are services that help to main- tain vehicle mobility.

General information The offering depends on the equipment ver- sion of the vehicle and the country-specific variant.

For further information on the available services, the vehicle manufacturer recom- mends contacting a service center or cus- tomer support.

Teleservices can comprise the following services:

Service Request, refer to page 244.

Teleservice Report, refer to page 245.

Teleservice Battery Guard, refer to page 245.

Your dealers service center, refer to page 245.

Roadside Assistance, refer to page 294.

Requirements Active MINI Connected contract or

equipment version with intelligent emergency call.

Cellular network reception.

Ignition or standby state is switched on.

Service Request

Automatic Service Request The Teleservice data on the vehicle's serv- ice notifications is sent automatically to the service center by MINI prior to the service deadline. If feasible, the service center will contact the customer about arranging a service appointment.

This way, the dealers service center can plan the necessary work in advance. This shortens the duration of the service ap- pointment.

Seite 244

COMMUNICATION MINI Connected

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Manual Service Request

Concept

Using a manually initiated Service Request, data on the vehicle's service notifications is directly sent by MINI to the service center. If feasible, the service center will contact the customer about arranging a service ap- pointment.

General information

A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message, refer to page 117.

Carry out service registration via the Check Control message: "Service request".

Starting a Service Request

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "Teleservice Call"

Last Service Request

Concept

The last Service Request, for instance the last report to the dealers service center, can be displayed on the Control Display.

Displaying the last Service Request

Check to see when the last Service Request was transmitted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Teleservice Call"

Teleservice Report

Concept Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the ongoing development of MINI prod-

ucts from the vehicle to MINI in regular in- tervals, if needed.

General information The Teleservice Report is free of charge and is activated in vehicles that meet the follow- ing requirements:

Certain technical requirements are met.

Active MINI Connected contract.

Equipped with intelligent emergency call.

Neither personal data nor position data is transmitted.

Teleservice Battery Guard

Concept If the battery charge state falls below cer- tain values, MINI will inform you or your dealers service center directly as warranted or the next time the vehicle is started.

General information If necessary and possible, the dealer's serv- ice center will contact you to arrange a service appointment.

The Battery Guard Teleservice is available on a country-specific basis and under the following conditions:

Certain technical requirements are met.

Active MINI Connected contract.

To receive information from the Battery Guard Teleservice, your contact data must be stored in the MINI Connected customer portal.

Your dealers service center

Concept The preset service center is displayed. It is possible to contact the service center.

Seite 245

MINI Connected COMMUNICATION

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General information To use Service Partner management in the vehicle, log in with the MINI Connected ac- cess data in the MINI Connected customer portal. In addition, your vehicle must be as- signed to your account in the MINI Con- nected customer portal.

Displaying service centers The service center that is currently as- signed to the vehicle is displayed as a con- tact in the vehicle.

1. "MINI Connected" or "Communication"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "Your service center" or select service partner management if necessary.

The assigned service center is displayed along with all its contact information.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following functions are available in a con- tact:

Call contact.

Updating MINI Assist

Concept Starts the manual update of all services available in the vehicle.

Updating services 1. "MINI Connected"

2. Press the button.

3. "Update MINI Services"

Customer support

Concept Contact customer support for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling customer support 1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "Customer support"

The customer support is displayed and a voice connection is established. If a voice connection is not established, dial the number manually.

Seite 246

COMMUNICATION MINI Connected

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Seite 247

MINI Connected COMMUNICATION

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Refueling

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to page 250, prior to refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Fuel cap

Opening 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the

rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at- tached to the fuel filler flap.

Seite 248

MOBILITY Refueling

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Closing

Warning

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay atten- tion that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en- gages.

Emergency unlocking It may be necessary in certain situations to unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in- stance with an electrical fault.

Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the following when re- fueling

General information When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:

Premature switching off.

Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop- erly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up.

Follow safety regulations posted at the gas station.

Safety information

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys- tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.

Seite 249

Refueling MOBILITY

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Fuel recommendation

General information Depending on the region, many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.

Gasoline

General information For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu- eling.

Ethanol should meet the following quality standards:

US: ASTM 4806xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511xx

xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and engine. Furthermore, the cata- lytic converter is permanently damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines:

Leaded gasoline.

Metallic additives, for instance man- ganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing metha- nol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the mini- mum quality can compromise engine func- tion or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the mini- mum quality.

Seite 250

MOBILITY Fuel

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi- tionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under cer- tain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high alti- tude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI number for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommenda- tions may result in the need for unsched- uled maintenance.

Recommended fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 91.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 93.

Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 89.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 91.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external tem- peratures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Seite 251

Fuel MOBILITY

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Tire inflation pressure

General information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following:

The service life of the tires.

Road safety.

Driving comfort.

Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and be- fore a long trip.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 254, contains all tire inflation pres- sure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pres- sure, please note the following:

Tire sizes of your vehicle.

Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla- tion pressure increases with the tire tem- perature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire inflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under- read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same tempera- ture as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.:

Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

Seite 252

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex- ample.

3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pres- sure.

4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Checking the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regu- larly, and correct it as needed.

Tire pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pres- sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta- ble, refer to page 254, and adjust as neces- sary.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driv- er's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/ 160 km/h.

Seite 253

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER, COOPER ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifica- tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/55 R 17 97 H A/S

225/55 R 17 97 W

225/55 R 17 97 H M+S

225/50 R 18 95 V A/S

225/50 R 18 95 W

225/50 R 18 99 W XL

205/65 R 16 95 H M+S

225/50 R 18 95 H M+S

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

Tire size Pressure specifica- tions in bar/PSI

225/45 R 19 92 W

225/45 R 19 96 W XL

225/45 R 19 96 Y XL

205/60 R 17 93 H M+S

205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

Emergency wheel

T 115/95 R 17 95 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 18 95 V A/S

225/50 R 18 95 W

225/55 R 17 97 H M+S

225/50 R 18 95 H M+S

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

Seite 254

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

225/45 R 19 96 Y XL

205/60 R 17 93 H M+S

205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S

225/45 R 19 92 W

225/45 R 19 96 W XL

2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36

Emergency wheel

T 115/95 R 17 95 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 18 95 V A/S

225/50 R 18 95 W

225/50 R 18 95 H M+S

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

225/45 R 19 92 W

205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning

In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex- cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob- serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres- sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 256, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 255

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

255 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER, COOPER ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifica- tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/55 R 17 97 H A/S

225/55 R 17 97 W

225/55 R 17 97 H M+S

225/50 R 18 95 V A/S

225/50 R 18 95 W

225/50 R 18 99 W XL

205/65 R 16 95 H M+S

225/50 R 18 95 H M+S

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

225/45 R 19 92 W

225/45 R 19 96 W XL

225/45 R 19 96 Y XL

205/60 R 17 93 H M+S

2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38

Tire size Pressure specifica- tions in bar/PSI

205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39

Emergency wheel

T 115/95 R 17 95 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 18 95 V A/S

225/50 R 18 95 W

225/55 R 17 97 H M+S

225/50 R 18 95 H M+S

225/45 R 19 96 Y XL

205/60 R 17 93 H M+S

205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S

2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41

225/45 R 19 92 W

225/45 R 19 96 W XL

3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel

T 115/95 R 17 95 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

Seite 256

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/50 R 18 95 V A/S

225/50 R 18 95 W

225/50 R 18 95 H M+S

2.9 / 42 2.9 / 42

225/45 R 19 92 W

205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S

3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45

Tire identification marks

Tire size 205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire load Maximum tire load is the maximum permis- sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR on the certification label on the drivers door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicles Gross Axle Weight Rating

GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0120

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0120: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Manufacture date You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT 0120 1st week 2020

Seite 257

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applica- ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera- ture A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the ac- tual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service prac- tices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern- ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction per- formance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera- ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform- ance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un- derinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 261, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the let- ters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Seite 258

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire tread

Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in- creased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re- quired minimum height of 0.063 in- ches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage

General information Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for- eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfa- ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta- cles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more

likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz- ards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions:

Unusual vibrations.

Unusual tire or running noises.

Unusual handling such as a strong ten- dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following sit- uations, for instance:

Driving over curbs.

Road damage.

Tire inflation pressure too low.

Vehicle overloading.

Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres- sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con- trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam- age is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this pur- pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire

Seite 259

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

259 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible, avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc- ing carried out by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information You can ask the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combina- tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your ve- hicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type.

Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak- ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con- trol. There is a risk of accident. To main- tain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configu- ration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manu- facturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- turing circumstances when tires are brand- new; they achieve their full traction poten- tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Seite 260

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreaded tires can have different tire cas- ing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of re- treaded tires.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operat- ing on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro- vide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires For your own safety, use only runflat tires. Further information is available from a deal- er's service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even

wear. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.

Storing tires

Tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

Concept Run-flat tires permit continued driving un- der restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General information The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driv- ing with a flat tire.

Seite 261

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- ity when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi- tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

Concept With the Mobility System, minor tire dam- age can be sealed temporarily to enable con- tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the dam- age from the inside.

General information Follow the instructions on using the

Mobility System found on the compres- sor and sealant container.

Use of the Mobility System may be inef- fective if the tire puncture measures ap- prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

Contact a dealer's service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

Do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.

Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal- ant container and apply it to the steer- ing wheel.

The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM wheel electronics re- placed at the next opportunity.

The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Seite 262

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Storage The Mobility System is located in a bag on the right side trim in the cargo area.

Sealant container

Sealant container, arrow 1.

Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant con- tainer.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder

3 Tire pressure gage

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button

5 On/off switch

6 Compressor

7 Connector/cable for socket

8 Connection hose

Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi- tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out- side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila- tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are color- less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex- haust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during ex- tended operation. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Do not run the compres- sor for more than 10 minutes.

Seite 263

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Filling 1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.

3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, en- suring that it engages audibly.

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con- tainer onto the tire valve of the non- working wheel.

5. With the compressor switched off, in- sert the plug into the power socket in- side the vehicle.

6. With the ignition switched on or the en- gine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

Seite 264

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

Checking 1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres- sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant

container from the tire valve.

2. Press the red unlocking device.

3. Remove the sealant container from the compressor.

4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached 1. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.

3. Screw the connection hose of the com- pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

4. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

5. With the ignition switched on or the en- gine running, switch on the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer's service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla- tion pressure is reached.

6. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

7. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.

2. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Seite 265

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Adjustment 1. Stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose of the com- pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

3. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar.

Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ignition switched on or the en- gine running, switch on the com- pressor.

Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

6. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 146.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 142.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

General information The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter- mined certain wheels and tires to be suita- ble for operation on the vehicle.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's in- structions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may re- sult in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly ac- tivate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of snow chains on un- suitable tires, the snow chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of snow chains.

Seite 266

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam- age tires and vehicle components. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Re- tighten as needed according to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.

Fine-link snow chains The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- mends the use of fine-link snow chains. Cer- tain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the ve- hicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable.

Information regarding suitable snow chains is available from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Use Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip- ped with the tires of the following size:

205/60 R 17.

205/55 R 18.

John Cooper Works:

205/60 R 17.

205/55 R 18.

Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed

immediately when there is a loss of tire in- flation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short- term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi- cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine.

DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve- hicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac- turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

Seite 267

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

267 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex- ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

Warning

When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this pur- pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the ve- hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi- cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal- ers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General information The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against roll- ing away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diago- nal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suit- able objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction.

Seite 268

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Lug bolt lock

Concept The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding.

Overview The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 284.

Lug bolt, arrow 1.

Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.

2. Unscrew the lug bolt.

3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt.

Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If

necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug bolt.

2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque is 140 Nm.

3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screwing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip

ground at a safe distance from traffic.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Set the parking brake.

Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.

As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out- side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appropriate distance.

Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.

Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.

Seite 269

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

269 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar- row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan- gular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand.

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle be- neath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly be- neath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.

7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the

Seite 270

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

ground and the relevant wheel is maxi- mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheel Mount one emergency wheel only, as re- quired.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.

3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.

If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross- wise pattern.

5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter- clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle.

6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se- curely.

After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The

tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.

2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary.

The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the nearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Emergency wheel

Concept In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the defective tire. The emergency wheel is only intended for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel has been re- placed.

General information Mount one emergency wheel only.

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regu- larly, and correct it as needed.

Safety information

Warning

The emergency wheel has particular di- mensions. When driving with an emer- gency wheel, changed driving properties may occur, for instance reduced lane sta- bility when braking, longer braking dis- tance, and changed self-steering proper- ties in the limit area. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not ex- ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 271

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

The emergency wheel and the wheel change tools are located in the cargo area under the cargo floor panel.

Removing the emergency wheel 1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor

panel.

2. Unscrew the butterfly screw.

3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover.

4. Where applicable, remove the holder and the trailer hitch.

5. Remove the jacking point and the tool holder on the left next to the emergency wheel.

6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left and remove it.

Inserting the emergency wheel 1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left

and slide it to the right.

2. Where applicable, mount the holder and the trailer hitch.

3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover.

4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly screw.

5. Insert and secure the jacking point and the tool holder on the left next to the emergency wheel.

6. Insert the cargo floor panel.

Seite 272

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Jump-starting, negative terminal

6 Coolant reservoir

Seite 273

Engine compartment MOBILITY

273 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage vehicle compo- nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine com- partment performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor- rectly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of in- jury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening the hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2.

Hood can be opened.

Seite 274

MOBILITY Engine compartment

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Seite 275

Engine compartment MOBILITY

275 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance:

Sporty driving style.

Break-in of the engine.

Idling of the engine.

With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear, depending on the engine oil level.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en- gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level cor- rected by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Electronic oil measurement

General information The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles:

Monitoring.

Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for in- stance when taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

Concept The engine oil level is monitored electroni- cally while driving and can be shown on the Control Display.

Seite 276

MOBILITY Engine oil

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

If the engine oil level is outside its permis- sible operating range, a Check Control mes- sage is displayed.

A red indicator light indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

Functional requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Concept The engine oil level is checked when the ve- hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis- sible operating range, a Check Control mes- sage is displayed.

General information During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.

Functional requirements Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-

tion.

Manual transmission: shift lever in neu- tral position, clutch and accelerator ped- als not depressed.

Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and ac- celerator pedal not depressed.

Engine is running and is at operating temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

4. "Measure engine oil level"

5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and dis- played via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General information Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument clus- ter.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to page 279.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition before adding engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Seite 277

Engine oil MOBILITY

277 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm- ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar- ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat- ing materials. Do not refill operating mate- rials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en- gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level cor- rected by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Overview The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment, refer to page 273.

Adding engine oil 1. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

3. Add engine oil.

4. Close the lid.

Engine oil types to add

General information The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc- tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property. When select- ing an engine oil, make sure that the en- gine oil has the correct oil rating.

Seite 278

MOBILITY Engine oil

278 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

BMW Longlife-17 FE+.

Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

Oil rating

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity grades When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol- lowing viscosity grades:

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil ratings and viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service inter- vals indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.

Seite 279

Engine oil MOBILITY

279 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi- tives of different colors. Observe the water - additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable additives is available from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the engine hot and the cooling sys- tem open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect addi- tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop- erty. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth- ing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

Checking There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

Seite 280

MOBILITY Coolant

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be- tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

6. Close the lid.

Adding coolant 1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

6. Close the lid.

7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi- nated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environ- mental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant ad-

ditives.

Seite 281

Coolant MOBILITY

281 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the opera- tional reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

Concept Sensors and special algorithms take into ac- count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to calculate the need for maintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information Information on service notifications, refer to page 123, can be displayed on the Control Display.

Service data in the vehicle key Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi- cle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve- hicle key with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent mainte- nance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Please consult your Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and

Seite 282

MOBILITY Maintenance

282 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on the perform- ance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that maintenance and repair be per- formed by a service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag- nosis

General information Devices connected to the OBD socket trig- ger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Remove any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in- tricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicles primary emissions sys- tem. Improper use of the socket for On- board Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehi- cle malfunctions and creates risks of per- sonal and property damage. Given the fore- going, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle's emissions.

Emissions The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Seite 283

Maintenance MOBILITY

283 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle tool kit

The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms.

2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

Seite 284

MOBILITY Replacing components

284 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade must engage audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Rear wiper blade 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper arm.

3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade must engage audibly.

4. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contri- bution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- mends that you have appropriate work per- formed by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not been described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 285.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are re- lated to conventional lasers and are offi- cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 285.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con- tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in- jury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Seite 285

Replacing components MOBILITY

285 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intensive brightness can irritate or dam- age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the head- lights or other light sources. Do not re- move the LED covers.

Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.

If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked.

Headlight setting The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed, have it checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Front halogen lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Halogen headlights

1 High beams

2 Low beams

3 Turn signal

High beams Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 285.

55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re- move.

Seite 286

MOBILITY Replacing components

286 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pull it out of the headlight toward the rear, arrow 2.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in reverse order of removal. In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor- rectly positioned in the headlight hous- ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en- gages.

6. Check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.

7. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages.

Low beams Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 285.

55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Turn the steering wheel.

2. On the left facing the driving direc- tion: turn the cover clockwise and remove it.

On the right facing the driving direc- tion: turn the cover counterclock- wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock- wise, and remove it.

4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, and pull it downward out of the headlight, arrow 2.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

6. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in reverse order of removal. In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor- rectly positioned in the headlight hous- ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en- gages.

Seite 287

Replacing components MOBILITY

287 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

7. Check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.

8. Install the covers. Make sure that the covers engage.

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 285.

24-watt bulb, PWY24W.

1. Turn the steering wheel.

2. On the left facing the driving direc- tion: turn the cover clockwise and remove it.

On the right facing the driving direc- tion: turn the cover counterclock- wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock- wise, and remove it.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

5. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn counterclockwise and re- move.

6. Insert the new bulb and install the cov- ers in the reverse order. Make sure that the covers engage.

LED front lights, bulb replacement

General information The following lights feature LED technol- ogy:

Daytime running lights

High beams

Low beams

Cornering light

Parking lights

Fog lights

In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal- er's service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

Seite 288

MOBILITY Replacing components

288 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

Position of the headlights

1 Turn signal

2 Daytime running lights

3 Low beams/high beams

4 Cornering light

LED bug light

1 Parking lights

2 Fog lights

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 285.

24-watt bulb, PWY24W.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 274.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re- move.

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

4. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn counterclockwise and re- move.

5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

LED front fog lights These front fog lights are made using LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 289

Replacing components MOBILITY

289 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

1 Side tail lights

2 Center brake light

3 License plate light

Side tail lights

1 Brake lights/tail lights

2 Turn signal

3 Reversing lights

Side LED tail lights

1 Brake light

2 Tail lights

3 Turn signal

4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 285.

Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights: P21W.

Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights: H21W.

Bulb, turn signals: P21W.

Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Through the opening, loosen the plug connector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Seite 290

MOBILITY Replacing components

290 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Press the latches together, arrows 1, and remove the bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the open- ing.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights

Arrow 2: turn signal

Arrow 3: reversing light

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Central brake light and license plate lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 285.

The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 285.

Bulb: WY5W.

1. Push the side turn signal forward in the driving direction, arrow 1, and swing it outward, arrow 2.

2. On the left facing the driving direc- tion: turn the bulb holder clockwise and remove.

On the right facing the driving direc- tion: turn the bulb holder counter- clockwise and remove.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder.

5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1, and swing it forward, arrow 2.

Vehicle battery

General information The battery is maintenance-free.

Seite 291

Replacing components MOBILITY

291 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

More information about the battery can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac- cident and damage to property. Only vehi- cle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your ve- hicle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealers serv- ice center.

Register the battery to the vehicle The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- mends that you have a service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been registered again, all comfort features will be available without restriction and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.

Charging the battery

General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi- ciently charged to guarantee that the bat- tery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.

Charge the battery in the following situa- tions:

When the inspection glass on the top of the battery is black.

When the take-off performance is insuf- ficient.

The following circumstances can have a negative effect on the performance of the battery:

Frequent short-distance drives.

The vehicle is not used for more than a month.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

Charging the battery Charge the battery only when the engine is off and via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 297, in the engine compartment.

Power failure After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example:

Memory function: store the positions again.

Time: update.

Date: update.

Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Seite 292

MOBILITY Replacing components

292 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright po- sition for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses The fuses are located in the glove compart- ment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse

boxes, is available on the Internet: www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a sepa- rate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

Seite 293

Replacing components MOBILITY

293 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis- play.

The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tail- gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General information Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

Seite 294

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

294 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

General information In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man- ufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

Via a Check Control message, refer to page 117.

Calling with a mobile phone.

Requirements Active MINI Connected contract or

equipment version with intelligent emergency call.

Cellular network reception.

The ignition is switched on.

Starting If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is offered through Teleservice Diag- nosis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically.

Teleservice Help Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by re- questing it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Control Display is switched on.

4. Confirm Teleservice Help.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be re- stored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures will be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis- tance will be informed.

Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call

Concept In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re- quest can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.

General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Re- quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora- ble conditions.

Seite 295

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

295 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements The ignition is switched on.

The Assist system is functional.

If the vehicle is equipped with intelli- gent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been acti- vated.

Automatic triggering Under certain conditions, for instance if the airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Auto- matic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green.

The LED is illuminated green when an Emergency Request has been initiated.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehi- cle until the voice connection has been established.

The LED flashes green when a connec- tion to the MINI Response Center has been established.

The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum- stances.

For this purpose, data that serves to de- termine the necessary rescue measures, for instance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the MINI Response Cen- ter.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Re- sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the hands-free system, for instance, may be broken. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emer- gency Request.

Jump-starting

General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehi- cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of inju- ries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Seite 296

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

296 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning

If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor- rect order during connection.

NOTICE

In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur- ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Make sure that no body contact occurs.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine com- partment acts as the battery's positive ter- minal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

A special connection on the body acts as the battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow- ing procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi- nal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi- tive jumper cable to the positive termi- nal of the battery, or to the correspond- ing starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega- tive jumper cable to the negative termi- nal of the battery, or to the correspond- ing engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Seite 297

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

297 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not suc- cessful, wait a few minutes before mak- ing another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several mi- nutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re- verse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Safety information

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Steptronic transmission with driven front axle: transporting the vehicle

General information The vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of damage to property. Have vehicle transported only with lifted front axle or on a loading platform.

Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 111.

Tow truck

Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Seite 298

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

298 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Steptronic transmission with ALL4: transporting the vehicle

General information The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 111.

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Manual transmission

Towing or pushing the vehicle A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 108.

NOTICE

If manual unlocking of the parking brake is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or towed. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Follow the following instructions:

Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavail- able.

Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering.

Larger steering wheel movements are required.

The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the ve- hicle's response.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.

Do not exceed a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km.

Seite 299

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

299 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tow truck

With driven front axle

Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

With ALL4

Have your vehicle transported on a flatbed surface only

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehi- cle should only be transported on a loading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Towing other vehicles

General information Switch on the hazard warning system, de- pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win- dow.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehi- cle's response. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve- hicle to be towed.

Seite 300

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

300 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in- correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mount- ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol- low the following:

Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.

The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope Observe the following notes when using the tow rope:

Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en- able the vehicle to be towed without jerking.

Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.

Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.

Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 284, are together in the cargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.

Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.

Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regular intervals.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.

Seite 301

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

301 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo- cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission.

Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 296. If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 91.

3. Engage third gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release

the pedal. After the engine starts, imme- diately press on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the haz- ard warning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

Seite 302

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

302 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Washing the vehicle

General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure wash- ers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pres- sure washer.

Distances and temperature Maximum temperature: 140 /60 .

Minimum distance from sensors, cam- eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic washing sys- tems or car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the following instruc- tions:

Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in or- der to avoid paint damage.

Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis.

Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.

Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam- age to the exterior mirrors.

With rod antenna: unscrew the rod antenna to avoid rod antenna break- age.

Deactivate the wiper and, if neces- sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper system.

Driving into a car wash with a manual transmission In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Seite 303

Care MOBILITY

303 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 108.

Driving into a car wash with a Steptronic transmission In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 111.

Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever po- sition N. A signal is sounded when an at- tempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a car wash Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Start the engine, refer to page 92.

Headlights Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in- stance from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac- tion can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the win- dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care products are available from a dealers serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instructions on the container.

Vehicle paint

General information Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influen- ces in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve- hicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re- moved immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Matte finish Only use cleaning and care products suita- ble for vehicles with matte finish.

Seite 304

MOBILITY Care

304 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Leather care Remove dust from the leather regularly, us- ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in- creased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substan- tially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General information Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro- fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams us- ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property. En- sure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 /60 . Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry them. The heat generated during brak- ing dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the ra- diator grille or door handles with plenty of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic- ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub- ber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili- con-containing vehicle care products in or- der to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com- ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Seite 305

Care MOBILITY

305 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol- ution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to re- tract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- jects in the vehicle such that they are se- cured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached

to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re- moved, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/Screens

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of dis- plays and screens. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Clean with a clean, anti- static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long-term vehicle storage When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must

Seite 306

MOBILITY Care

306 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

be taken. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 307

Care MOBILITY

307 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance val- ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected special equipment, country version or coun- try-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval docu- ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob- tained from a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-spe- cific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into ac- count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for instance due to the selected special equipment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Countryman

Width with mirrors in/mm 78.9/2,005

Width without mirrors in/mm 71.7/1,822

Height in/mm 61.3/1,557

Length in/mm 169.8/4,314

Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.4/11.4

Seite 308

REFERENCE Technical data

308 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Weights

MINI Cooper Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,376/1,985

Load lbs/kg 851/386

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,326/1,055

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,183/990

MINI Cooper S Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,542/2,060

Load lbs/kg 968/439

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,260/1,025

MINI Cooper Countryman ALL4

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,564/2,070

Load lbs/kg 862/391

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,293/1,040

MINI Cooper S Countryman ALL4

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,696/2,130

Load lbs/kg 902/409

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,469/1,120

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,337/1,060

MINI John Cooper Works Countryman ALL4

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,696/2,130

Load lbs/kg 871/395

Seite 309

Technical data REFERENCE

309 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

MINI John Cooper Works Countryman ALL4

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,502/1,135

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,337/1,060

Capacities

MINI Countryman

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 16.1/61.0

Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 250.

Seite 310

REFERENCE Technical data

310 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the edito- rial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

Notes: notes: own safety: maintenance.

Quick Reference Guide: on the road: re- fueling stop: topping up the engine oil.

Driving tips: observe when driving: driv- ing on a race track.

Mobility: engine oil: topping up the en- gine oil.

Mobility: coolant: coolant level.

Mobility: preventive maintenance: MINI maintenance system.

Mobility: preventive maintenance: Con- dition Based Service CBS.

Mobility: preventive maintenance: Main- tenance Manual and Service and War- ranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Seite 311

Appendix REFERENCE

311 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

License Texts and Certifications

Headunit

Brazil

Este equipamento opera em carter secun- drio, isto , no tem direito a proteo con- tra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de esta- es do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio.

Europe

European Union: Declaration of Conformity

Hereby, Alpine Electronics , Inc. declares that the radio equipment type BIS01 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of con- formity is avallable at the following internet address: http://www.alpine.com/e/ research/

Technical information

Frequency Band: 2.5 GHz

Output Power : 8 dBm

Manufacturer and Address

Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics, Inc.

Address: 20-1, Yoshima Industrial Park, Iwaki, Fukushima 970-1192 Japan

Phone: +81-246-36-4111

Alpine Electronics , BIS01 2014/53/. : http:// www.alpine.com/e/research/

etina Tmto Alpine Electronics prohlauje, e typ rdiovho zazen BIS01 je v souladu se smrnic 2014/53/EU. pln znn EU prohlen o shod je k dispozici na tto in- ternetov adrese: http://www.alpine.com/e/ research/

Dansk Hermed erklrer Alpine Electronics, at radi- oudstyrstypen BIS01 er i overensstemmelse med direktiv 2014/53/EU. EU-overensstem- melseserklringens fulde tekst kan findes p flgende internetadresse: http:// www.alpine.com/e/research/

Deutsch Hiermit erklrt Alpine Electronics, dass der Funkanlagentyp BIS01 der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht. Der vollstndige

Seite 312

REFERENCE License Texts and Certifications

312 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Text der EU-Konformittserklrung ist un- ter der folgenden Internetadresse verfg- bar: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Eesti Kesolevaga deklareerib Alpine Electronics, et kesolev raadioseadme tp BIS01 vastab direktiivi 2014/53/EL nuetele. ELi vastavusdeklaratsiooni tielik tekst on kt- tesaadav jrgmisel internetiaadressil: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

English Hereby, Alpine Electronics declares that the radio equipment type BIS01 is in compli- ance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declararation of conformity is avilable at the following internet ad- dress :http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Espaol Por la presente, Alpine Electronics declara que el tipo de equipo radioelctrico BIS01 es conforme con la Directiva 2014/53/UE. El texto completo de la declaracin UE de conformidad est disponible en la direccin Internet siguiente: http:// www.alpine.com/e/research/

/ Alpine Electronics, BIS01 2014/53/. : http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Franais Le soussign, Alpine Electronics, dclare que l'quipement radiolectrique du type BIS01 est conforme la directive 2014/53/UE. Le texte complet de la dclara- tion UE de conformit est disponible

l'adresse internet suivante: http:// www.alpine.com/e/research/

Hrvatski Alpine Electronics ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa BIS01 u skladu s Dir- ektivom 2014/53/EU. Cjeloviti tekst EU iz- jave o sukladnosti dostupan je na sljedeoj internetskoj adresi: http:// www.alpine.com/e/research/

slenska Hr, Alpine Electronics lsir yfir a rad- bnaur ger BIS01 er samrmi vi tilski- pun 2014/53 / ESB. The fullur texti af ESB declararation samrmi er avilable eftir- farandi veffangi: http://www.alpine.com/e/ research/

Italiano Il fabbricante, Alpine Electronics , dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio BIS01 conforme alla direttiva 2014/53/UE. Il testo completo della dichiarazione di conformit UE disponibile al seguente indirizzo Inter- net: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Latviski Ar o Alpine Electronics deklar, ka radioie- krta BIS01 atbilst Direktvai 2014/53/ES. Pilns ES atbilstbas deklarcijas teksts ir pieejams d interneta vietn: http:// www.alpine.com/e/research/

Lietuvi A, Alpine Electronics, patvirtinu, kad radijo rengini tipas BIS01 atitinka Direktyv 2014/53/ES. Visas ES atitikties deklaracijos tekstas prieinamas iuo interneto adresu: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Nederlands Hierbij verklaar ik, Alpine Electronics, dat het type radioapparatuur BIS01 conform is

Seite 313

License Texts and Certifications REFERENCE

313 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

met Richtlijn 2014/53/EU. De volledige tekst van de EU-conformiteitsverklaring kan worden geraadpleegd op het volgende inter- netadres: http://www.alpine.com/e/ research/

Malti B'dan, Alpine Electronics, niddikjara li dan it-tip ta' tagmir tar-radju BIS01 huwa kon- formi mad-Direttiva 2014/53/UE. It-test kollu tad-dikjarazzjoni ta' konformit tal-UE huwa disponibbli f'dan l-indirizz tal-Internet li ej: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Magyar Alpine Electronics igazolja, hogy a BIS01 t- pus rdiberendezs megfelel a 2014/53/EU irnyelvnek. Az EU-megfelel- sgi nyilatkozat teljes szvege elrhet a kvetkez internetes cmen: http:// www.alpine.com/e/research/

Norsk Erklrer herved Alpine Electronics at radio- utstyr typen BIS01 er i samsvar med direk- tiv 2014/53 / EU. Den fullstendige teksten i EU declararation samsvars er avilable p flgende internettadresse: http:// www.alpine.com/e/research/

Polski Alpine Electronics niniejszym owiadcza, e typ urzdzenia radiowego BIS01 jest zgodny z dyrektyw 2014/53/UE. Peny tekst deklaracji zgodnoci UE jest dostpny pod nastpujcym adresem internetowym: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Portugus O(a) abaixo assinado(a) Alpine Electronics declara que o presente tipo de equipamento de rdio BIS01 est em conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/UE. O texto integral da declarao de conformidade est disponvel

no seguinte endereo de Internet: http:// www.alpine.com/e/research/

Romn Prin prezenta, Alpine Electronics declar c tipul de echipamente radio BIS01 este n conformitate cu Directiva 2014/53/UE. Textul integral al declaraiei UE de confor- mitate este disponibil la urmtoarea adres internet: http://www.alpine.com/e/ research/

Slovensko Alpine Electronics potrjuje, da je tip radi- jske opreme BIS01 skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU. Celotno besedilo izjave EU o skladnosti je na voljo na naslednjem splet- nem naslovu: http://www.alpine.com/e/ research/

Slovensk Alpine Electronics tmto vyhlasuje, e rdi- ov zariadenie typu BIS01 je v slade so smernicou 2014/53/E. pln E vyhlse- nie o zhode je k dispozcii na tejto interne- tovej adrese: http://www.alpine.com/e/ research/

Suomi Alpine Electronics vakuuttaa, ett radiolai- tetyyppi BIS01 on direktiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen. EU-vaatimustenmukaisuusva- kuutuksen tysimittainen teksti on saata- villa seuraavassa internetosoitteessa: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Svenska Hrmed frskrar Alpine Electronics att denna typ av radioutrustning BIS01 ver- ensstmmer med direktiv 2014/53/EU. Den fullstndiga texten till EU-frskran om verensstmmelse finns p fljande webba- dress: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Seite 314

REFERENCE License Texts and Certifications

314 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Japan

Mexico

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y

(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada.

Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan

: 2.5

: 8

South Korea

A ( )

(A )

,

.

Taiwan

1.

Low Power radio frequency electric machi- nery was qualified by Type Approval, not get permission from authority; the company, business or user cant arbitrarily change frequency, increase power or modify feature or function of original design.

2.

Seite 315

License Texts and Certifications REFERENCE

315 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Use of low power radio frequency electric machinery cant affect flight safety and in- terfere with legal communication; once dis- cover the interfered phenomenon, it should stop immediately and improve to no inter- ference and then could continue to use.

The preceding legal communication is radio communication which follows Telecommu- nication Act to operate.

Low power radio frequency electric machi- nery must tolerate interference from legal communication or electric machinery appa- ratus of industry, science and medical radia- tion.

USA, Canada

USA (FCC) and Canada (IC) Register model name:BIS01

Product code: RB00010A

FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the users authority to oper- ate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause unde- sired operation.

Le prsent appareil est conforme la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC et aux normes des CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux ap- pareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploita- tion est autorise aux deux conditions sui-

vantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonc- tionnement.

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radi- ation exposure limits set forth for an uncon- trolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive expo- sure evaluation (MPE). ()

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements nonces pour un environnement non contrl et re- specte les rgles les radiolectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d'exposition et dexposition aux frquences radiolectri- ques (RF) CNR-102 de lIC. Cet quipement met une nergie RF trs faible qui est con- sidre comme conforme sans valuation de lexposition maximale autorise (MPE). ()

Zambia

Information regarding Open Source Software Licenses

The IwIP A Lightweight TCP/IP stack included in some products is licensed under the BSD licence. A copy of that license in the English original version with a copy-

Seite 316

REFERENCE License Texts and Certifications

316 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

right notice, a disclaimer of warranty, and an exclusion of liability is included below. Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of Computer Science. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following condi- tions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright no- tice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following dis- claimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PRO- VIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS`` AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, IN- CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IM- PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTA- BILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDEN- TAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE- QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABIL- ITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Remote Control

Mexico

COFETEL: RLVBHEID130912

IFETEL: RLVBHEID18-1287

Marca: Hella

Modelo (s): IDGNG1

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y

(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada.

USA/Canada FCC ID:NBGIDGNG1

FCC ID NBG-IDNGN1M

FCC 15.19 Labelling requirements

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada li- cence-exempt RSS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC 15.21 Information to user

Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli-

Seite 317

License Texts and Certifications REFERENCE

317 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

ance could void the user's authority to oper- ate the equipment.

IC: 2694A-IDGNG1

IC: 2694A-IDGNG1

Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil- lage, et

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro- mettre le fonctionnement.

FCC 15.19 Labelling requirements

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada li- cence-exempt RSS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC 15.21 Information to user

Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to oper- ate the equipment.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- tem

Canada IC: 7812D-TIS07

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

USA FCC ID: KR5TIS-07

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Transmitter/Receiver

Mexico IFETEL: RLVCOA213-1447

A2C35029700

Continental Automotive GmbH

Siemensstrasse 12

93055 Regensburg

Germany

Para su uso en Mxico, la operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos con- diciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y

(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada.

Canada/USA Model: A2C35029700

IC: 7812D-35029700

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

Seite 318

REFERENCE License Texts and Certifications

318 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

(1) this device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil- lage, et

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro- mettre le fonctionnement.

Model: A2C35029700

FCC ID:KR5A2C35029700

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Seite 319

License Texts and Certifications REFERENCE

319 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS Antilock Braking System 158 Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con-

trol 115 Accessories and parts 10 ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 163 Activated-charcoal filter 190 Activation times, parked-car ventila-

tion 191 Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based

cruise control 163 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 149 Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis-

play 156 Adaptive chassis 160 Additives, engine oil types 278 Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa-

tion Display (CID) 40 Adjustments, steering wheel 84 Airbags 138 Airbags, indicator and warning light 140 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air

mode 185, 189 Air conditioner 184 Air conditioning, climate 185, 188 Air distribution, manual 185, 190 Air drying, see Air conditioning 185, 188 Air flow, air conditioner 185 Air flow, automatic climate control 189 Air pressure, tires 252 Air vents, see Ventilation 190 Alarm system 67 Alarm triggering 67 Alarm, unintentional 68 ALL4 160 All-season tires, see Winter tires 261 All-wheel drive, see ALL4 160 AM/FM station 228 Antifreeze, washer fluid 106

Antilock Braking System ABS 158 Anti-slip control, see DSC 158 Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 269 Approach control warning with city light

braking function 150 Approved axle load 309 Ash tray 198 Assistance when driving off 161 Assistance with breakdown 294 Audio 236 Audio playback, Bluetooth 236 Audio playback, pause 224 AUTO intensity 189 Automatic climate control 187 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-

ror 83 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-

ger airbags 140 Automatic headlight control 133 Automatic locking 66 Automatic recirculated-air control 189 Automatic Service Request 244 Automatic transmission with Step-

tronic 108 Automatic unlocking 66 Automatic vehicle wash 303 AUTO program, automatic climate con-

trol 188 AUTO program, intensity 189 Auto Start/Stop function 94 Auto washing 303 Average consumption 127 Average speed 127 Axle loads, weights 309

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup- port 74, 75

Backrest, seats 73

Seite 320

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

320 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Balance, sound settings 226 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 294 Bass, sound settings 226 Battery, disposing of 293 Battery Guard, Teleservice 245 Battery, vehicle 291 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-

ing 298 Belts, safety belts 77 Beverage holder, cup holder 202 Blocking, power window 70 Bluetooth audio 236 Bluetooth connection 46 Bonus range, GREEN Mode 220 Bottle holder, see Cup holder 202 Brake assistant 158 Brake discs, break-in 212 Brake force display 156 Brake lights, brake force display 156 Brake pads, break-in 212 Braking, information 214 Breakdown assistance 294 Breakdown, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 146 Breaking in 212 Brightness of Control Display 43 Bulb replacement 285 Bulb replacement, front 286, 288 Bulb replacement, rear 290 Bulb replacement, side 291 Bulbs and lights 285 Button, SOS 295 Button, Start/Stop 91 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 296

C

California Proposition 65 Warning 10 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-

ligent Safety 149 Camera-based cruise control 163 Camera lenses, care 306 Camera, rearview camera 176 Can holder, see Cup holder 202 Care, displays 306 Care, light-alloy wheels 305 Care, vehicle 304

Care, washing the vehicle 303 Cargo area 204 Cargo area, adapting size 208 Cargo area, enlarging 206 Cargo area lid 61 Cargo area, loading 204 Cargo area, seating surface 210 Cargo area, storage compartments 206 Cargo cover 205 Cargo position, rear seat backrest 206 Cargo, stowing and securing 204 Cargo straps 205 Carpet, care 306 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas

system 213 CBS Condition Based Service 282 Center armrest 202 Center console 34 Central Information Display (CID) 36 Central Information Display (CID), see Con-

trol Display 37 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 130 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-

side 57 Central screen, see Control Display 37 Changes, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 9 Changing parts 284 Changing wheels 267 Changing, wheels and tires 260 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification

number 15 Check Control 117 Checking the oil level electronically 276 Check oil level 276 Children, seating position 85 Children, transporting safely 85 Child restraint system 85 Child restraint system LATCH 88 Child restraint systems, mounting 86 Child safety locks 90 Child seat, mounting 86 Child seats 85 Chrome parts, care 305 Cigarette lighter 198 Cleaning, displays 306

Seite 321

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

321 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Clearance, water 214 Climate control 184, 187 Clothes hooks 203 Coasting 221 Coasting with engine decoupled, coast-

ing 221 Coasting with idling engine 221 Combination switch, see Turn signals 98 Combi switch, see Wiper system 99, 103 Comfort Access 58 Communication 240 Compartments in the doors 202 Compass 196 Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-

ces 46 Compressor 262 Computer, see Onboard Computer 126 Condensation on windows 190 Condensation under the vehicle 215 Condition Based Service CBS 282 Conference, see Calls with multiple par-

ties 241 Configuring driving program 161 Confirmation signal 67 Connecting device 45 Connecting electrical devices, see Sock-

ets 198 Connections 45 Consumption, see Average consump-

tion 127 Consumption, see Current consump-

tion 123 Contacts 242 Continued driving with a flat tire 145, 148 Control Display 37 Controller 38 Control systems, driving stability 158 Convenient closing 54 Convenient opening 53 Cooling, maximum 188 Cornering light 134 Corrosion on brake discs 215 Cosmetic mirror 198 Coupling, see Pairing 45 Courtesy lights during unlocking 53 Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 54

Cruise control 170 Cruise control, active 163 Cruise control with distance control, see

Camera-based cruise control 163 Cruise control without distance control, see

Cruise control 170 Cruising range 122 Cup holder 202 Current consumption 123 Customer support 246

D

Damage, tires 259 Data memory 11 Data protection, settings 45 Data, technical 308 Date 42 Date, display 122 Daytime pedestrian collision mitiga-

tion 153 Daytime running lights 134 DCC, see Cruise control 170 Defrosting, see Defrosting the win-

dows 186 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 190 Defrosting the windows 186 Deleting personal data 45 Deletion of personal data 45 Device list 45 Digital clock 122 Digital compass 196 Digital radio, see HD Radio reception 229 Dimensions 308 Dimmable exterior mirrors 83 Dimmable interior mirror 84 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 98 Display, date 122 Display, electronic, instrument cluster 117 Display, engine temperature 128 Display, GREEN Mode 218 Display, iDrive 36 Display lighting, see Instrument light-

ing 136 Displays 116 Displays, care 306

Seite 322

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

322 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Disposal, coolant 281 Disposal, vehicle battery 293 Distance control, see PDC 172 Drive-off assistant 161 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 158 Driver assistance, see Intelligent

Safety 149 Driver profiles 65 Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-

ing Modes switch 160 Driving Excitement, SPORT 129 Driving instructions, breaking in 212 Driving mode, GREEN 218 Driving modes 160 Driving notes, general 213 Driving notes, things to remember when

driving 212 Driving on poor roads 216 Driving on racetracks 216 Driving stability control systems 158 Driving through water 214 Driving tip, GREEN tip 220 Driving tips 213 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 158 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 159 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas-

sis 160 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 158 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 159

E

Easy Opener 60 Electronic displays, instrument cluster 117 Electronic oil measurement 276 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see

DSC 158 Emergency Request 295 Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-

sistance 294 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 249 Emergency unlocking, transmission

lock 114 Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see

Emergency wheel 271 Energy control 123

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 94 Engine, automatic switch-off 94 Engine compartment 273 Engine compartment, working in 274 Engine coolant 280 Engine idling when driving, coasting 221 Engine oil 276 Engine oil, adding 277 Engine oil change 279 Engine oil filler neck 277 Engine oil types to add 278 Engine start, see Jump-starting 296 Engine start, see Starting the engine 92 Engine stop 93 Engine temperature, display 128 Entering a vehicle wash 303 Entertainment, control elements 224 Entertainment source, changing 224 Equipment, interior 193 Error displays, see Check Control 117 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see

DSC 158 Exchanging, wheels and tires 260 Exhaust gas system 213 Exiting a vehicle wash 303 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-

tor 83 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 83 Exterior mirrors 82 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 83 External start 296 External temperature display 122 External temperature warning 122 Eyes for securing cargo 205

F

Fader, sound settings 226 Failure message, see Check Control 117 False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 68 Fan, see Air flow 185, 189 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 77 Filler neck for engine oil 277 Filter, see Microfilter 186

Seite 323

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

323 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil- ter 190

Fine wood, care 305 First-aid kit 294 Flat tire, changing wheels 267 Flat Tire Monitor TPM 146 Flat tire, repairing 262 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142 Flat tire, warning light 143, 147 Flooding, driving through 214 Floor carpet, care 306 Floor mats, care 306 FM/AM station 228 Fogged up windows 186 Fold-away position, windshield wip-

ers 102, 105 Foot brake 214 For Your Own Safety 9 Front airbags 138 Front fog lights 135 Front fog lights, LED, bulb replace-

ment 289 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-

activation 140 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator

light 141 Front seats 73 Fuel 250 Fuel cap 248 Fuel filler flap 248 Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 249 Fuel gauge 121 Fuel quality 250 Fuel recommendation 250 Fuel, tank capacity 310 Fuse 293

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer- sal Remote Control 193

Gasoline 250 Gear shift indicator 124 General driving notes 213 General settings 42 Glare shield 198

Glass sunroof, initialize the system 72 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-

roof 71 Glove compartment 201 Gong, volume equalization 226 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 43 GREEN bonus range 220 GREEN Mode 218 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 160 GREEN tip, driving tip 220 Gross vehicle weight, approved 309 Ground clearance 215

H

Halogen headlights 286 Handbrake, see Parking brake 96 Hand-held transmitter, alternating

code 194 Hands-free system 242 Hazard warning flashers 294 HD Radio 229 Head airbag 139 Headlight control, automatic 133 Headlight flasher 99 Headlight glass 286 Headlights, care 304 Head restraints and seats 73 Head restraints, front 79 Head restraints, rear 80 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 204 High-beam Assistant 134 High beams 99 High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-

sistant 134 Hills 214 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-

tant 161 Holder for beverages 202 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote

Control 193 Homepage, see Internet 8 Hood 274 Horn 32 Hot exhaust gas system 213 Hotline, see Customer support 246

Seite 324

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

324 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Hydroplaning 213

I

Ice warning, see External temperature warning 122

Icy roads, see External temperature warn- ing 122

Identification marks, tires 257 Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-

cation number 15 Ignition off 91 Ignition on 91 Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-

ter 130 Indication of a flat tire 143, 147 Indicator and warning lights, see Check

Control 117 Indicator light, see Check Control 117 Individual air distribution 185, 190 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 65 Inflation pressure, tires 252 Inflation pressure warning, tires 146 Info Display 117 Information 8 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 147 Input, iDrive 36 Instrument cluster 116 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 117 Instrument lighting 136 Integrated key 56 Integrated Universal Remote Control 193 Intelligent emergency call 295 Intelligent Safety 149 Intended use 9 Intensity, AUTO program 189 Interior equipment 193 Interior lights 136 Interior lights during unlocking 53 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 54 Interior mirror 82 Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 84 Interior mirror, compass 196 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 83

Interior motion sensor 68 Internet site 8 Interval display, service notifications 123 Interval mode 100, 103 In the vicinity of the center console 34 In the vicinity of the roofliner 35 In the vicinity of the steering wheel 32 iPod/iPhone 236

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 269 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 72 Jam protection system, windows 69 Jump-starting 296

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 58 Key, see Integrated key 56 Key, see Vehicle key 52 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 111 Knee airbag 139

L

Label on recommended tires 260 Label, runflat tires 261 Language, set on Control Display 42 Lashing eyes 205 LATCH child restraint fixing system 88 Launch Control 115 Leather care 305 LED ring, central instrument cluster 130 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 285 Letters and numbers, entering 36 Light 132 Light-alloy wheels, care 305 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 285 Lighter 198 Lighting 132 Light replacement 285 Light replacement, front 286, 288 Light replacement, rear 290 Light replacement, side 291

Seite 325

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

325 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Lights and bulbs 285 Light switch 132 List of all messages 44 Load 205 Loading 204 Loading position 206 Location, vehicle position 43 Locking, automatic 66 Locking, from inside 57 Locking, see Opening and Closing 52 Locking, settings 66 Low beams 132 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-

sistant 134 Lower back support 75 Lower back support, mechanical 74 Lug bolt lock 269 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage

rack 215 Lumbar support 75 Lumbar support, mechanical 74

M

Maintenance 282 Maintenance requirements 282 Maintenance, service notifications 123 Maintenance system, MINI 282 Make-up mirror 198 Malfunction displays, see Check Con-

trol 117 Manual air flow 185 Manual brake, see Parking brake 96 Manual control, air distribution 185, 190 Manual control, air flow 189 Manual mode, transmission 112 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 173 Manual operation, rearview camera 176 Manual transmission 107 Manufacturer of the MINI 9 Matt paint, care 304 Maximum cooling 188 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit

Info 125 Maximum speed, winter tires 261

Measuring units 43 Mechanical key 56 Media of the Owner's Manual 51 Medical kit 294 Memory function 81 Menu in instrument cluster 126 Menus, Central Information Display

(CID) 39 Messages 44 Messages, see Check Control 117 Microfilter 186, 190 Microphone, muting 241 MID - program, driving dynamics 160 MINI driving modes 160 MINI logo projection during unlocking 53 MINI maintenance system 282 Minimum tread, tires 259 MINI Picnic Bench 210 MINI Roadside Assistance 294 MINI Teleservices 244 Mirrors 82 Mobile communication devices in the vehi-

cle 213 Mobile phone 240 Mobile phone, connecting 45 Mobile phone, operation 240 Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 294 Mobility System 262 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 9 Moisture in headlight 286 Monitor, see Control Display 37 Mounting of child restraint systems 86 MP3 player, see Audio 236 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32

N

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints front 79

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints rear 80

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy rims 305 New wheels and tires 260 No-touch closing of the tailgate 60

Seite 326

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

326 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

No-touch opening of the tailgate 60

O

OBD Onboard Diagnosis 283 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 177 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel

grade 251 Odometer 121 Oil 276 Oil, adding 277 Oil change 279 Oil filler neck 277 Oil service interval, service notifica-

tions 123 Oil types to add, engine 278 Onboard Computer 126 Onboard Diagnosis OBD 283 Onboard literature, printed 51 Onboard vehicle tool kit 284 On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 294 Opening and Closing 52 Opening, from inside 57 Operating concept Central Information Dis-

play (CID) operating concept 36 Operating menus, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 36 Operation via the Controller 39 Optional equipment 9 Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air

control 189 Owner's Manual, printed 51

P

Paint, car care 304 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 68 Panic mode 68 Panoramic glass sunroof 71 Parallel parking assistant 178 Park Distance Control PDC 172 Parked-car ventilation 191 Parked vehicle, condensation 215 Parking aid, see PDC 172

Parking assistant 178 Parking brake 96 Parking lights 132 Parts and accessories 10 Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 83 Pathway lighting 133 Pathway lines, rearview camera 177 Pause, audio playback 224 PDC Park Distance Control 172 Performance Control 160 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 65 Phone conference, see Calls with multiple

parties 241 Phone, connecting 45 Picnic Bench 210 Plastic, care 306 Poor roads, driving on 216 PostCrash - iBrake 157 Power failure 292 Power windows 69 Pressure, tires 252 Pressure warning, tires 146 Printed onboard literature 51 Profiles, see Driver profiles 65 Programmable memory buttons, Central In-

formation Display (CID) 41 Protective function, glass sunroof 72 Protective function, windows 69 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 38

R

Racetrack operation 216 Radio 228 Radio, adjusting the volume 224 Radio, control elements 224 Radio Data System RDS 228 Radio, muting 224 Radio-ready state 92 Radio, tone settings 226 Rain sensor 100, 103 Ratchet straps 205 RDS Radio Data System 228 Rear lights 290 Rear seat backrests, folding down 206

Seite 327

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

327 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Rear seats 76 Rearview camera 175 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 82 Rear window defroster 186, 190 Rear window wiper, operation 101, 105 Recirculated-air filter 190 Recirculated-air mode 185, 189 Recommended fuel grade 251 Recommended tire brands 260 Refueling 248 Remaining range 122 Remote control, universal 193 Replacing parts 284 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 55 Replacing, wheels and tires 260 Reporting safety malfunctions 15 RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise con-

trol 163 RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 170 Reserve warning, see Range 122 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142 Retreaded tires 261 Roadside parking lights 133 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 194 RON recommended fuel grade 251 Roofliner 35 Roof-mounted luggage rack 215 RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat

tires 261 Rubber components, care 305 Runflat tires 261

S

Safe braking 214 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and

front passenger seat 79 Safety belts 77 Safety belts, care 306 Safety locks, doors, and windows 90 Safety switch, windows 70 Safety systems, airbags 138 Satellite radio 230 Saving fuel 217 Screens, care 306 Screen, see Control Display 37

Screwdriver 284 Sealant, see Mobility System 262 Seat heating, front 76 Seating position for children 85 Seats and head restraints 73 Seats, front 73 Seats, rear 76 Securing cargo 204 Selection list in instrument cluster 126 Sensors, care 306 Service and warranty 11 Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 294 Service notifications, display 123 Service Request 245 Service requirements, Condition Based

Service CBS 282 Servotronic 162 SET button, camera-based cruise con-

trol 163 SET button, Cruise Control 170 Settings, general 42 Settings, locking/unlocking 66 Settings, mirrors 82 Settings, seats and head restraints 73 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 113 Side airbag 138 Signaling, horn 32 Signals when unlocking 67 Sitting safely 73 Sizes, see Dimensions 308 Slide/tilt glass roof 71 Smartphone, connecting 45 Smartphone, operation 240 Snow chains 266 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 283 Sockets, electrical devices 198 SOS button 295 Sound output 224 Source, changing, see Entertainment

source, changing 224 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 271 Speed, average 127 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit

Info 125 Speed Limit Info 125

Seite 328

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

328 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 128 Speed Volume, volume equalization 226 Speed warning 129 Sport displays 129 SPORT program, driving dynamics 161 Sport program, transmission 112 Stability control systems 158 Standard equipment 9 Start/stop, automatic function 94 Start/Stop button 91 Starting the engine 92 Station, AM/FM 228 Station, renaming 229 Stations, stored 235 Station, storing 228 Status information, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 37 Status of Owner's Manual 9 Status, vehicle 131 Steering assistance 162 Steering column adjustment 84 Steering wheel, adjusting 84 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step-

tronic transmission 108 Steptronic Sport transmission with double

clutch, see Steptronic transmission 108 Steptronic transmission 108 Steptronic transmission with double clutch,

see Steptronic transmission 108 Stopping the engine 93 Storage compartments 201 Storage, tires 261 Store Mirror position, see Memory func-

tion 81 Store seat position, see Memory func-

tion 81 Storing the vehicle 306 Stowing and securing cargo 204 Suitable devices 46 Suitable mobile phones 46 Summer tires, tread 259 Sun visor 198 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 51 Supplementary text message 121 Switch for driving dynamics 160

Switching calls, see Calls with multiple par- ties 241

Switch, see Cockpit 32 Symbols 8

T

Tachometer 121 Tailgate 61 Tailgate, closing with no-touch activa-

tion 60 Tailgate, opening with no-touch activa-

tion 60 Tailgate via vehicle key 54 Tail lights 290 Technical changes, see For Your Own

Safety 9 Technical data 308 Telephone 240 Telephone conference, see Calls with multi-

ple parties 241 Telephone, operation 240 Teleservice Battery Guard 245 Teleservice Report 245 Teleservices 244 Temperature, air conditioner 184 Temperature, automatic climate con-

trol 187 Temperature display for external tempera-

ture 122 Temperature, engine 128 Terminal, starting aid 297 Text message, see Check Control mes-

sages 121 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 67 Thigh support 76 Tilt alarm sensor 68 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 83 Time 42 Tire damage 259 Tire identification marks 257 Tire inflation pressure 252 Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see

TPM 146 Tire pressure 252

Seite 329

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

329 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 262 Tires 252 Tires, changing 260 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 262 Tires, runflat 261 Tire tread 259 Tone 226 Tools 284 Total vehicle weight 309 Towing 298 Tow-starting 298 TPM Flat Tire Monitor 146 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 142 Traction control 159 TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control,

DTC 159 Transmission lock, electronic unlock-

ing 114 Transmission lock, releasing manually 114 Transmission, manual transmission 107 Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-

sion 108 Transporting children safely 85 Tread, tires 259 Treble, sound settings 226 Trip computer 128 Triple turn signal activation 98 Trip odometer 121 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 121 Trunk, see Cargo area 204 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 177 Turn signal, front 286, 288 Turn signal, indicator light 120 Turn signal, side 291 Turn signals, operation 98 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 290

U

Unintentional alarm 68 Units, see Measuring units 43 Universal remote control 193 Unlocking, automatic 66 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 52 Unlocking, settings 66

Updates made after the editorial deadline 9 Upholstery care 305 USB connection 48 USB port, position in vehicle 199 USB storage device 236 Used battery, disposing of 293 Use, intended 9

V

Vanity mirror 198 Vehicle battery 291 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-

tance 294 Vehicle, breaking in 212 Vehicle care 304 Vehicle care products 304 Vehicle features and options 9 Vehicle identification number 15 Vehicle jack 269 Vehicle key, additional 55 Vehicle key, loss 55 Vehicle key, malfunction 55 Vehicle key, opening/closing 52 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 55 Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 52 Vehicle paint, care 304 Vehicle position, vehicle location 43 Vehicle status 131 Vehicle storage 306 Vehicle wash 303 Vehicle wash, automatic 303 Vehicle, washing 303 Ventilation 190 Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 191 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15 Voice command response, smartphone 243 Volume equalization 226

W

Warning and indicator lights, see Check Control 117

Warning displays, see Check Control 117 Warning messages, see Check Control 117

Seite 330

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

330 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Warning triangle 294 Warranty 9 Washer fluid 106 Washer nozzles, windshield 101, 105 Washing the vehicle 303 Water on roads 214 Weights 309 Welcome lights 133 Welcome lights during unlocking 53 Wheel base, vehicle 308 Wheels 252 Wheels, changing 260 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142 Windows, powered 69 Windshield cleaning system 99, 103 Windshield defroster 186, 190 Windshield washer fluid 106 Windshield washer nozzles 101, 105 Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-

tion 102, 105 Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-

tem 99, 103 Winter storage, care 306 Winter tires, suitable tires 261 Winter tires, tread 259 Wiper blades, replacing 284 Wiper fluid 106 Wiper system 99, 103 Wood, care 305 Word match concept, navigation 36 Wrench 284

Y

Your dealer's service center 245

Seite 331

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

331 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

01405A02C73 ue

*BL5A02C7300P*

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California:

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02C73 - II/20

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Mini Connected Mini works, you can view and download the Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2021 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Mini Mini Connected as well as other Mini manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mini Mini Connected. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2021 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2021 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2021 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2021 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2021 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.